ROI-S06701-051E080409

P ASOLINK

N ETWORK

M ANAGEMENT

T ERMINAL

PNMT (Java version)Operation Manual(for PASOLINK NEO)NEC CorporationCopyright copy 2008ROI-S06701- i -Table of ContentsDocument Warranty 11 Getting Started 211 Introduction 212 Conventions Used in This Manual 213 PNMT Communication Interfaces 3131 Communications 3132 LCT Port Interface314 Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO4

15 Software Requirements 42 System Operation amp Maintenance 521 The PNMT Screen 522 Launching the PNMT Application823 Login 9231 User Access Privilege Levels1024 Shutting Down the PNMT 1225 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE1326 Change Password1427 Alarm Buzzer Setting 1528 Refresh 1629 Remote Viewing using PNMT main window17210 License 18211 Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH) 21212 ODU Tab22213 MODEM Tab23214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE Tab25215 SUB (PROT) Interface Tab 28216 Auxiliary IO Tab 302161 Monitored Items 302162 Photocoupler Input Setting312163 Relay Output Setting32217 Control (CTRL) Tab 332171 Control Module332172 Setting the DateTime 342173 CPU Reset342174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control Module 352175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control Module372176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control Module 382177 Downloading the Software Key Files392178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PC402179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PC4021710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PC4121711 Configuring the Equipment Network Settings42218 Maintenance 442181 Selecting Maintenance452182 Mode452183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)462184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)462185 ATPC Manual Control462186 TX Mute Control47

2187 CW Control472188 IF Loopback472189 DADE Adjust48ROI-S06701- ii -21810 LAN Device Reset4821811 Linearizer Control4821812 RF Setting4921813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)4921814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)4921815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)5021816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)5221817 APS Manual Control5321818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)5321819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)5321820 ALS Restart5421821 XPIC Control54219 Equipment Setup 552191 Equipment Configuration window552192 Editing the Note for CTRL562193 Setup562194 Frequency Channel64220 Provisioning 652201 Channel Setting692202 DXC Setting 702203 BER Threshold Setting742204 SC Assignment 742205 LAN Port Setting 752206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)77

2207 TX Power CTRL772208 SW Condition782209 SW Condition (APS)7822010 Relay Configuration7922011 Cluster Alarm Input 7922012 EOW2 External Setting7922013 PMON Select8022014 Alarm Correlation Capability8022015 XPIC Condition - Local Fail80221 Link Performance Monitor812211 Viewing Summary Link Performance Monitor 812212 Threshold Setting832213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) window84222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) 852221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]862222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]882223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]91223 Event Log942231 Event Log monitor94224 Inventory Tab952241 Inventory Monitor 95Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)96Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)101ROI-S06701- 1 -Document Warranty1 The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice2 The PNMSPNMT screens in this manual are only examples Screens will vary accordingto equipment configurations equipment operation modes setting parametersPNMSPNMT application program version etc Screens contained in this manual arecurrent at the moment of publishing however they may differ slightly from the actualscreens on your PNMSPNMT3 This manual is written on the assumption that you already understand the restrictionslimitations and precautions necessary to operate the equipment properly Refer to therespective equipment manual for detailsROI-S06701- 2 -1 Getting Started11 IntroductionThe PNMT is a computer-based PASOLINK Network Management Terminal system

developed by NEC for management of NECrsquos PASOLINK wireless transmission networkThe PNMT is a scaled down version of PASOLINK Network Management System (PNMS)that is designed as a maintenance tool for field engineers to locally and remotely monitoralarms control points generate reports and archive data all within a familiar graphical userinterface and all in real time Throughout this manual ldquothe PNMTrdquo generally refers to themobile laptop computer in which the NEC PNMT software package (that interfaces andcontrols NEC PASOLINK series short haul wireless equipment) is installed inThis software package remotely monitors and controls the status and configuration of anentire PASOLINK network with associated equipment as well as the performance of theactual microwave radio links12 Conventions Used in This ManualFont What the Font Represents ExampleItalic For manual titles or relateddocument namesPlease refer to PASOLINKOperation Manual for detailsHostnameBoldItems on the user interfaceItems on the computer displayFile and directory namesThe Overall window[Button] Buttons in the user interface Click [OK] button to continueClick [Execute] button to sendcommandMenu Items A menu name followed by acolon () means that you mustselect the menu and then theitemWhen the item is followed byan arrow (1048774) a cascadingmenu followsSelect System 1048774 LoginLogoutltusernamegtA command variable wherethe user must make theappropriate entryThis is also commonly usedwhen asking for a passwordltpasswordgtKeycap Keyboard keys Press Enter keyROI-S06701- 3 -13 PNMT Communication Interfaces131 CommunicationsCommunications between the PNMT and the wireless network equipment is possiblebull via the LCT port of the equipment132 LCT Port InterfaceThe LCT port is located on the front of the equipmentPNMT ndash IDU ConnectionThe PNMT and the Control (CTRL) Module mounted in the IDU must be connected using astandard USB cable (the Type A plug is fitted into the Type A socket of the PNMT computerand the Type B plug is fitted into the Type B socket of the LCT Port on the IDU Control

(CTRL) Module)The LCT port has the following specificationsbull Connector type USB Type B (female)bull Bit per second rate 120024004800960019200 (default 19200)bull Stop bits 1bull Data bit length 8bull Parity no parityROI-S06701- 4 -14 Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEOPASOLINK NEO has four types of IDUbull 1+0 (Terminal)bull 1+1 (Hot Stand-by)bull 1+1 (Twin Path)bull 2-WAY 11+0 (Terminal)1+1 (Hot Stand-by) 1+1 (Twin Path) 2-WAY1 Only PDH supports 2-WAYHardware RequirementsRecommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz (or equivalent)bull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T (X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker15 Software Requirementsbull OS Windows 2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull Acrobat Readerbull PNMT Application softwareROI-S06701- 5 -2 System Operation amp MaintenanceThis chapter explains the menu structure and procedures for operating the PNMT Theexplanation uses typical PNMT screens to illustrate the hierarchy of menu21 The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate its titlebull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options illustrates thecommands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also candisplay an operation manual

bull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functionscan be executed in the NE-specific menu barbull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its mainpurpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the Data Windowbull IP address Window (for 2-WAY system only)The IP addresses for the respective opposite stations connected to DIR-ADIR-B aredisplayed in the IP address window Each selected station has a button which whenclicked enables the display mode for the respective connected device(s) to be switched fromDIR-A to DIR-B (or vice versa)The available display options areOpposite station is displayed blue backgroundOpposite station is not displayed or no opposite station is connected (IP address is displayedas rdquo000000000000rdquo) white backgroundbull Overall Status WindowThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for theNE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed herebull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the Data Windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data Windowbull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerROI-S06701- 6 -bull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pinkstatus value White disabled Gray maintenance YellowROI-S06701- 7 -Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT WindowCommonTool BarBlockDiagramNE-SpecificMenu BarLogin UserCommonMenu BarText Box

Command ButtonRadio ButtonTabsIP addressWindowOverallStatusWindowDataWindowTitle BarROI-S06701- 8 -22 Launching the PNMT ApplicationTo start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start 1048774 Programs 1048774 PNMTj 1048774 Pnmt then continue to the login windowNOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of yourcomputer once PNMT has startedROI-S06701- 9 -23 LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (refer to the table shown in section 231 User AccessPrivilege Levels) of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in thewindow depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may notbe carried outThe highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and networkmanagement systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login windowappears2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for therespective user4 For Connection select Dialup5 For Dialup Entry Name selectPNMT(USB)6 Click the [Login] button If you wish toexit the program click [Exit] buttonLogin UserROI-S06701- 10 -231 User Access Privilege Levels1048774 Available Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible Functions

Category ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminSYSTEM ALARM BUZZER - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONNECT (Remote Login) - - - 1048774 1048774EQUIPMENT (Wizard Setting) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETUP NE NAME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774NOTE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PROVISIONING CHANNEL SETTING CH USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE ERROR REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS GENERATED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E1 PORT IMPEDANCE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DXC CH Setting DXC Function - - 1048774 1048774 1048774BER THRESHOLD HIGH BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETTING LOW BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC ASSIGNMENT RS-232C-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN PORT SETTING PORTx USAGE(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) PORTx USAGE 1048774 1048774 1048774SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774FLOW CONTROL PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) FLOW CONTROL PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COLLISION REPORT PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) COLLISION REPORT PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LINK LOSS FORWARDING PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) LINK LOSS FORWARDINGPORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLOCK SOURCE SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 10487742M FRAMING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SUB SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MEDIA TYPE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE SPEED amp DUPLEX - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE LINK LOSS FORWARDING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE FLOW CONTROL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS ALS FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS INTERVAL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX POWER CTRL MTPC TX POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC THRESHOLD LEVEL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ADDITIONAL ATT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MAX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MIN) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

ROI-S06701- 11 -1048774 Available Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible FunctionsCategory ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminATPC POWER MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COMM ALARM MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION TX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774for TXRX SW RX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

RX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW CONDITION-XPIC RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION for APS APS MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SF - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SIGNAL DEGRADE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN COUNT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN DETECT TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN HOLD TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONDITIONLOCALFAIL XPIC CONDITION-LOCAL FAIL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF CONTROL TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN DEVICE RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTERx ALARM - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON PMON Threshold - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CTRL CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items that do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06701- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06701- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network

1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar of PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both theselected and its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE via remote accessROI-S06701- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Re-enter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to the PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06701- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new settingROI-S06701- 16 -28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo Refresh

Click Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06701- 17 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1 configuration)ROI-S06701- 18 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes the relevant license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this screen If you exchanging the license file click [Import] andadvance the following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06701- 19 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06701- 20 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06701- 21 -211 Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The Overall Status Window provides a snapshot ofthe most significant monitored items in the NEThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NEThis window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed hereThe following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1

bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or ManualTransmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1

bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1

bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2

bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 (OPTICAL) interface)bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODU

configuration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusWindowROI-S06701- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU(These monitored items are identical for PDH and SDH)ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredODU TypeMismatchIn NEOc ODU(CPV) connection mode this alarm isissued when the Modulation Scheme setting is notQPSK16QAMNoneTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter in the ODUit is issued when the transmission level decreases 3dB or more from the preset minimum ATPC levelNoneTX INPUT Indicates the status of the ODU input signal from theIDU it is issued when the input signal from the IDUis lostNoneRX LEVEL Indicates the status of the received RF signal levelof the ODU it is issued when the RF signal dropsbelow the RX thresholdNoneAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizer in the ODU itis issued when an anomaly occurs in the synthesizerNoneODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in the ODU it isissued when an anomaly occurs during CPUoperationNoneMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)NoneLO REF Indicates the status of the LO reference signal usedfor VH signal synchronization When the referencesignal in the ODU falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedfor XPICTCN-Rx LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for15 min alarmNoneTCN-Rx LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for

1 day alarmNoneTx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for transmitting signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standbyRx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for receiving signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathROI-S06701- 23 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulator-demodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomaly occurs in themodulator-demodulatorNoneMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properly mounted Ifthe MODEM contact is unplugged or if none ismounted (in accordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNoneMODEM TypeMismatchIndicates that CTRL FW Version (4xx) andMODEM Parameter Version (50 or higher) are notcompatible This alarm is also issued when noCompact MODEM is setNoneLOF Indicates the frame synchronization status If thesynchronization with DMR is lost this alarm isissuedNoneFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers of an NE and itsopposite are out of syncNoneHigh BER Indicates severe quality deterioration status If thesignal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthis alarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable threshold levels are 1E-31E-4 and 1E-5NoneROI-S06701- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLow BER Indicates low to moderate quality deterioration statusbetween radio sections When the signaldeteriorates below the present threshold value thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The selectable threshold values are 1E-6

1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status If the signaldeteriorates beyond the present threshold level thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The present threshold is a BER of 1E-9NoneMOD Indicates the operating status of the MOD If anyanomaly occurs in the modulator this alarm isissuedNoneDEM Indicates the operating status of the DEM If anyanomaly occurs in the demodulator this alarm isissuedNoneInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of the input powervoltage When there is an anomaly in the inputvoltage this alarm is issuedNonePower Supply Indicates the operating status of the power supplyWhen there is an anomaly in the power supply thisalarm is issuedNoneIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable between IDU andODU If a short circuit is caused between ODU andthe IDU this alarm is issuedNoneCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cable equalizer Thisalarm is issued when the equalizer function does notkick inNoneXIF Indicates the status of the XIF input signal of theMain Master IDU and Sub Master IDU When theXIF input signal falls below the threshold this alarmis issued and the XPIC function is resetfor XPICXPIC Status Indicates the status of XPIC operation When theXPIC function is reset ldquoResetrdquo is indicated and theldquoResetrdquo LED on the front panel is litfor XPICXREF Indicates the status of the CLK reference signalused for VH signal synchronization When there isan anomaly in the reference OSC in the MODEMhis alarm is issuedfor XPICLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizer functionOPR When the linearizer function is usedNO OPR When the linearizer function is not usedIn this case TX output power decreasesapprox 4 dBm from a standard valueNA When the ODU is used without linearizerfunctionNot available in QPSKModulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOcODU(CPV) connection modeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating status this alarm isissued when the linearizer is not properly operatingin the OPR stateNot available in QPSKmodulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOc

ODU(CPV) connection modeFading Status Indicates anomalies in signal strength this alarm isissued when signal is too weakNoneATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of the ATPC If theATPC is not properly functioning stop the controland maintain the TX output level at HOLD MIN(selectable)Only when ATPC is usedROI-S06701- 25 -214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interfacePDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the Main InterfaceIf any anomaly occurs in the INTFC (1) Module thisalarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (1)does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneInput LOS CH (1 ndash 48) Indicates the input status of the input E1 signal fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedOnly when CH USAGE is setas usedAIS received CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedAIS Received Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as usedDepending on whether theAIS Received Condition(Provisioning) is set toStatus or AlarmAIS generated CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedAIS Generated Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as used

ROI-S06701- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUsage Error CH(1 - 48)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interface WhenE1 signal is applied to the input interface as long asit is set to Not Used this alarm is generated Thisparameter is indicated only when CH Usage ErrorReport has been selectedCH Usage Error Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as not usedINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B) 1Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (in anychannel)NoneLAN Link Port (1-4) Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedLAN Collision Port(1-4)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-4)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-4)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at used1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYSDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC(1) does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the MAIN INTFC If

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

15 Software Requirements 42 System Operation amp Maintenance 521 The PNMT Screen 522 Launching the PNMT Application823 Login 9231 User Access Privilege Levels1024 Shutting Down the PNMT 1225 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE1326 Change Password1427 Alarm Buzzer Setting 1528 Refresh 1629 Remote Viewing using PNMT main window17210 License 18211 Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH) 21212 ODU Tab22213 MODEM Tab23214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE Tab25215 SUB (PROT) Interface Tab 28216 Auxiliary IO Tab 302161 Monitored Items 302162 Photocoupler Input Setting312163 Relay Output Setting32217 Control (CTRL) Tab 332171 Control Module332172 Setting the DateTime 342173 CPU Reset342174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control Module 352175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control Module372176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control Module 382177 Downloading the Software Key Files392178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PC402179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PC4021710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PC4121711 Configuring the Equipment Network Settings42218 Maintenance 442181 Selecting Maintenance452182 Mode452183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)462184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)462185 ATPC Manual Control462186 TX Mute Control47

2187 CW Control472188 IF Loopback472189 DADE Adjust48ROI-S06701- ii -21810 LAN Device Reset4821811 Linearizer Control4821812 RF Setting4921813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)4921814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)4921815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)5021816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)5221817 APS Manual Control5321818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)5321819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)5321820 ALS Restart5421821 XPIC Control54219 Equipment Setup 552191 Equipment Configuration window552192 Editing the Note for CTRL562193 Setup562194 Frequency Channel64220 Provisioning 652201 Channel Setting692202 DXC Setting 702203 BER Threshold Setting742204 SC Assignment 742205 LAN Port Setting 752206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)77

2207 TX Power CTRL772208 SW Condition782209 SW Condition (APS)7822010 Relay Configuration7922011 Cluster Alarm Input 7922012 EOW2 External Setting7922013 PMON Select8022014 Alarm Correlation Capability8022015 XPIC Condition - Local Fail80221 Link Performance Monitor812211 Viewing Summary Link Performance Monitor 812212 Threshold Setting832213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) window84222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) 852221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]862222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]882223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]91223 Event Log942231 Event Log monitor94224 Inventory Tab952241 Inventory Monitor 95Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)96Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)101ROI-S06701- 1 -Document Warranty1 The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice2 The PNMSPNMT screens in this manual are only examples Screens will vary accordingto equipment configurations equipment operation modes setting parametersPNMSPNMT application program version etc Screens contained in this manual arecurrent at the moment of publishing however they may differ slightly from the actualscreens on your PNMSPNMT3 This manual is written on the assumption that you already understand the restrictionslimitations and precautions necessary to operate the equipment properly Refer to therespective equipment manual for detailsROI-S06701- 2 -1 Getting Started11 IntroductionThe PNMT is a computer-based PASOLINK Network Management Terminal system

developed by NEC for management of NECrsquos PASOLINK wireless transmission networkThe PNMT is a scaled down version of PASOLINK Network Management System (PNMS)that is designed as a maintenance tool for field engineers to locally and remotely monitoralarms control points generate reports and archive data all within a familiar graphical userinterface and all in real time Throughout this manual ldquothe PNMTrdquo generally refers to themobile laptop computer in which the NEC PNMT software package (that interfaces andcontrols NEC PASOLINK series short haul wireless equipment) is installed inThis software package remotely monitors and controls the status and configuration of anentire PASOLINK network with associated equipment as well as the performance of theactual microwave radio links12 Conventions Used in This ManualFont What the Font Represents ExampleItalic For manual titles or relateddocument namesPlease refer to PASOLINKOperation Manual for detailsHostnameBoldItems on the user interfaceItems on the computer displayFile and directory namesThe Overall window[Button] Buttons in the user interface Click [OK] button to continueClick [Execute] button to sendcommandMenu Items A menu name followed by acolon () means that you mustselect the menu and then theitemWhen the item is followed byan arrow (1048774) a cascadingmenu followsSelect System 1048774 LoginLogoutltusernamegtA command variable wherethe user must make theappropriate entryThis is also commonly usedwhen asking for a passwordltpasswordgtKeycap Keyboard keys Press Enter keyROI-S06701- 3 -13 PNMT Communication Interfaces131 CommunicationsCommunications between the PNMT and the wireless network equipment is possiblebull via the LCT port of the equipment132 LCT Port InterfaceThe LCT port is located on the front of the equipmentPNMT ndash IDU ConnectionThe PNMT and the Control (CTRL) Module mounted in the IDU must be connected using astandard USB cable (the Type A plug is fitted into the Type A socket of the PNMT computerand the Type B plug is fitted into the Type B socket of the LCT Port on the IDU Control

(CTRL) Module)The LCT port has the following specificationsbull Connector type USB Type B (female)bull Bit per second rate 120024004800960019200 (default 19200)bull Stop bits 1bull Data bit length 8bull Parity no parityROI-S06701- 4 -14 Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEOPASOLINK NEO has four types of IDUbull 1+0 (Terminal)bull 1+1 (Hot Stand-by)bull 1+1 (Twin Path)bull 2-WAY 11+0 (Terminal)1+1 (Hot Stand-by) 1+1 (Twin Path) 2-WAY1 Only PDH supports 2-WAYHardware RequirementsRecommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz (or equivalent)bull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T (X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker15 Software Requirementsbull OS Windows 2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull Acrobat Readerbull PNMT Application softwareROI-S06701- 5 -2 System Operation amp MaintenanceThis chapter explains the menu structure and procedures for operating the PNMT Theexplanation uses typical PNMT screens to illustrate the hierarchy of menu21 The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate its titlebull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options illustrates thecommands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also candisplay an operation manual

bull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functionscan be executed in the NE-specific menu barbull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its mainpurpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the Data Windowbull IP address Window (for 2-WAY system only)The IP addresses for the respective opposite stations connected to DIR-ADIR-B aredisplayed in the IP address window Each selected station has a button which whenclicked enables the display mode for the respective connected device(s) to be switched fromDIR-A to DIR-B (or vice versa)The available display options areOpposite station is displayed blue backgroundOpposite station is not displayed or no opposite station is connected (IP address is displayedas rdquo000000000000rdquo) white backgroundbull Overall Status WindowThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for theNE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed herebull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the Data Windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data Windowbull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerROI-S06701- 6 -bull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pinkstatus value White disabled Gray maintenance YellowROI-S06701- 7 -Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT WindowCommonTool BarBlockDiagramNE-SpecificMenu BarLogin UserCommonMenu BarText Box

Command ButtonRadio ButtonTabsIP addressWindowOverallStatusWindowDataWindowTitle BarROI-S06701- 8 -22 Launching the PNMT ApplicationTo start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start 1048774 Programs 1048774 PNMTj 1048774 Pnmt then continue to the login windowNOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of yourcomputer once PNMT has startedROI-S06701- 9 -23 LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (refer to the table shown in section 231 User AccessPrivilege Levels) of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in thewindow depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may notbe carried outThe highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and networkmanagement systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login windowappears2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for therespective user4 For Connection select Dialup5 For Dialup Entry Name selectPNMT(USB)6 Click the [Login] button If you wish toexit the program click [Exit] buttonLogin UserROI-S06701- 10 -231 User Access Privilege Levels1048774 Available Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible Functions

Category ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminSYSTEM ALARM BUZZER - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONNECT (Remote Login) - - - 1048774 1048774EQUIPMENT (Wizard Setting) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETUP NE NAME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774NOTE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PROVISIONING CHANNEL SETTING CH USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE ERROR REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS GENERATED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E1 PORT IMPEDANCE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DXC CH Setting DXC Function - - 1048774 1048774 1048774BER THRESHOLD HIGH BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETTING LOW BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC ASSIGNMENT RS-232C-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN PORT SETTING PORTx USAGE(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) PORTx USAGE 1048774 1048774 1048774SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774FLOW CONTROL PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) FLOW CONTROL PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COLLISION REPORT PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) COLLISION REPORT PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LINK LOSS FORWARDING PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) LINK LOSS FORWARDINGPORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLOCK SOURCE SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 10487742M FRAMING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SUB SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MEDIA TYPE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE SPEED amp DUPLEX - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE LINK LOSS FORWARDING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE FLOW CONTROL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS ALS FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS INTERVAL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX POWER CTRL MTPC TX POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC THRESHOLD LEVEL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ADDITIONAL ATT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MAX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MIN) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

ROI-S06701- 11 -1048774 Available Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible FunctionsCategory ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminATPC POWER MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COMM ALARM MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION TX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774for TXRX SW RX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

RX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW CONDITION-XPIC RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION for APS APS MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SF - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SIGNAL DEGRADE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN COUNT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN DETECT TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN HOLD TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONDITIONLOCALFAIL XPIC CONDITION-LOCAL FAIL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF CONTROL TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN DEVICE RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTERx ALARM - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON PMON Threshold - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CTRL CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items that do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06701- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06701- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network

1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar of PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both theselected and its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE via remote accessROI-S06701- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Re-enter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to the PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06701- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new settingROI-S06701- 16 -28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo Refresh

Click Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06701- 17 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1 configuration)ROI-S06701- 18 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes the relevant license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this screen If you exchanging the license file click [Import] andadvance the following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06701- 19 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06701- 20 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06701- 21 -211 Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The Overall Status Window provides a snapshot ofthe most significant monitored items in the NEThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NEThis window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed hereThe following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1

bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or ManualTransmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1

bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1

bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2

bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 (OPTICAL) interface)bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODU

configuration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusWindowROI-S06701- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU(These monitored items are identical for PDH and SDH)ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredODU TypeMismatchIn NEOc ODU(CPV) connection mode this alarm isissued when the Modulation Scheme setting is notQPSK16QAMNoneTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter in the ODUit is issued when the transmission level decreases 3dB or more from the preset minimum ATPC levelNoneTX INPUT Indicates the status of the ODU input signal from theIDU it is issued when the input signal from the IDUis lostNoneRX LEVEL Indicates the status of the received RF signal levelof the ODU it is issued when the RF signal dropsbelow the RX thresholdNoneAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizer in the ODU itis issued when an anomaly occurs in the synthesizerNoneODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in the ODU it isissued when an anomaly occurs during CPUoperationNoneMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)NoneLO REF Indicates the status of the LO reference signal usedfor VH signal synchronization When the referencesignal in the ODU falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedfor XPICTCN-Rx LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for15 min alarmNoneTCN-Rx LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for

1 day alarmNoneTx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for transmitting signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standbyRx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for receiving signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathROI-S06701- 23 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulator-demodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomaly occurs in themodulator-demodulatorNoneMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properly mounted Ifthe MODEM contact is unplugged or if none ismounted (in accordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNoneMODEM TypeMismatchIndicates that CTRL FW Version (4xx) andMODEM Parameter Version (50 or higher) are notcompatible This alarm is also issued when noCompact MODEM is setNoneLOF Indicates the frame synchronization status If thesynchronization with DMR is lost this alarm isissuedNoneFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers of an NE and itsopposite are out of syncNoneHigh BER Indicates severe quality deterioration status If thesignal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthis alarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable threshold levels are 1E-31E-4 and 1E-5NoneROI-S06701- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLow BER Indicates low to moderate quality deterioration statusbetween radio sections When the signaldeteriorates below the present threshold value thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The selectable threshold values are 1E-6

1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status If the signaldeteriorates beyond the present threshold level thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The present threshold is a BER of 1E-9NoneMOD Indicates the operating status of the MOD If anyanomaly occurs in the modulator this alarm isissuedNoneDEM Indicates the operating status of the DEM If anyanomaly occurs in the demodulator this alarm isissuedNoneInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of the input powervoltage When there is an anomaly in the inputvoltage this alarm is issuedNonePower Supply Indicates the operating status of the power supplyWhen there is an anomaly in the power supply thisalarm is issuedNoneIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable between IDU andODU If a short circuit is caused between ODU andthe IDU this alarm is issuedNoneCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cable equalizer Thisalarm is issued when the equalizer function does notkick inNoneXIF Indicates the status of the XIF input signal of theMain Master IDU and Sub Master IDU When theXIF input signal falls below the threshold this alarmis issued and the XPIC function is resetfor XPICXPIC Status Indicates the status of XPIC operation When theXPIC function is reset ldquoResetrdquo is indicated and theldquoResetrdquo LED on the front panel is litfor XPICXREF Indicates the status of the CLK reference signalused for VH signal synchronization When there isan anomaly in the reference OSC in the MODEMhis alarm is issuedfor XPICLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizer functionOPR When the linearizer function is usedNO OPR When the linearizer function is not usedIn this case TX output power decreasesapprox 4 dBm from a standard valueNA When the ODU is used without linearizerfunctionNot available in QPSKModulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOcODU(CPV) connection modeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating status this alarm isissued when the linearizer is not properly operatingin the OPR stateNot available in QPSKmodulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOc

ODU(CPV) connection modeFading Status Indicates anomalies in signal strength this alarm isissued when signal is too weakNoneATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of the ATPC If theATPC is not properly functioning stop the controland maintain the TX output level at HOLD MIN(selectable)Only when ATPC is usedROI-S06701- 25 -214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interfacePDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the Main InterfaceIf any anomaly occurs in the INTFC (1) Module thisalarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (1)does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneInput LOS CH (1 ndash 48) Indicates the input status of the input E1 signal fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedOnly when CH USAGE is setas usedAIS received CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedAIS Received Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as usedDepending on whether theAIS Received Condition(Provisioning) is set toStatus or AlarmAIS generated CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedAIS Generated Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as used

ROI-S06701- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUsage Error CH(1 - 48)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interface WhenE1 signal is applied to the input interface as long asit is set to Not Used this alarm is generated Thisparameter is indicated only when CH Usage ErrorReport has been selectedCH Usage Error Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as not usedINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B) 1Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (in anychannel)NoneLAN Link Port (1-4) Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedLAN Collision Port(1-4)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-4)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-4)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at used1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYSDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC(1) does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the MAIN INTFC If

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

2187 CW Control472188 IF Loopback472189 DADE Adjust48ROI-S06701- ii -21810 LAN Device Reset4821811 Linearizer Control4821812 RF Setting4921813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)4921814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)4921815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)5021816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)5221817 APS Manual Control5321818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)5321819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)5321820 ALS Restart5421821 XPIC Control54219 Equipment Setup 552191 Equipment Configuration window552192 Editing the Note for CTRL562193 Setup562194 Frequency Channel64220 Provisioning 652201 Channel Setting692202 DXC Setting 702203 BER Threshold Setting742204 SC Assignment 742205 LAN Port Setting 752206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)77

2207 TX Power CTRL772208 SW Condition782209 SW Condition (APS)7822010 Relay Configuration7922011 Cluster Alarm Input 7922012 EOW2 External Setting7922013 PMON Select8022014 Alarm Correlation Capability8022015 XPIC Condition - Local Fail80221 Link Performance Monitor812211 Viewing Summary Link Performance Monitor 812212 Threshold Setting832213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) window84222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) 852221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]862222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]882223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]91223 Event Log942231 Event Log monitor94224 Inventory Tab952241 Inventory Monitor 95Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)96Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)101ROI-S06701- 1 -Document Warranty1 The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice2 The PNMSPNMT screens in this manual are only examples Screens will vary accordingto equipment configurations equipment operation modes setting parametersPNMSPNMT application program version etc Screens contained in this manual arecurrent at the moment of publishing however they may differ slightly from the actualscreens on your PNMSPNMT3 This manual is written on the assumption that you already understand the restrictionslimitations and precautions necessary to operate the equipment properly Refer to therespective equipment manual for detailsROI-S06701- 2 -1 Getting Started11 IntroductionThe PNMT is a computer-based PASOLINK Network Management Terminal system

developed by NEC for management of NECrsquos PASOLINK wireless transmission networkThe PNMT is a scaled down version of PASOLINK Network Management System (PNMS)that is designed as a maintenance tool for field engineers to locally and remotely monitoralarms control points generate reports and archive data all within a familiar graphical userinterface and all in real time Throughout this manual ldquothe PNMTrdquo generally refers to themobile laptop computer in which the NEC PNMT software package (that interfaces andcontrols NEC PASOLINK series short haul wireless equipment) is installed inThis software package remotely monitors and controls the status and configuration of anentire PASOLINK network with associated equipment as well as the performance of theactual microwave radio links12 Conventions Used in This ManualFont What the Font Represents ExampleItalic For manual titles or relateddocument namesPlease refer to PASOLINKOperation Manual for detailsHostnameBoldItems on the user interfaceItems on the computer displayFile and directory namesThe Overall window[Button] Buttons in the user interface Click [OK] button to continueClick [Execute] button to sendcommandMenu Items A menu name followed by acolon () means that you mustselect the menu and then theitemWhen the item is followed byan arrow (1048774) a cascadingmenu followsSelect System 1048774 LoginLogoutltusernamegtA command variable wherethe user must make theappropriate entryThis is also commonly usedwhen asking for a passwordltpasswordgtKeycap Keyboard keys Press Enter keyROI-S06701- 3 -13 PNMT Communication Interfaces131 CommunicationsCommunications between the PNMT and the wireless network equipment is possiblebull via the LCT port of the equipment132 LCT Port InterfaceThe LCT port is located on the front of the equipmentPNMT ndash IDU ConnectionThe PNMT and the Control (CTRL) Module mounted in the IDU must be connected using astandard USB cable (the Type A plug is fitted into the Type A socket of the PNMT computerand the Type B plug is fitted into the Type B socket of the LCT Port on the IDU Control

(CTRL) Module)The LCT port has the following specificationsbull Connector type USB Type B (female)bull Bit per second rate 120024004800960019200 (default 19200)bull Stop bits 1bull Data bit length 8bull Parity no parityROI-S06701- 4 -14 Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEOPASOLINK NEO has four types of IDUbull 1+0 (Terminal)bull 1+1 (Hot Stand-by)bull 1+1 (Twin Path)bull 2-WAY 11+0 (Terminal)1+1 (Hot Stand-by) 1+1 (Twin Path) 2-WAY1 Only PDH supports 2-WAYHardware RequirementsRecommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz (or equivalent)bull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T (X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker15 Software Requirementsbull OS Windows 2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull Acrobat Readerbull PNMT Application softwareROI-S06701- 5 -2 System Operation amp MaintenanceThis chapter explains the menu structure and procedures for operating the PNMT Theexplanation uses typical PNMT screens to illustrate the hierarchy of menu21 The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate its titlebull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options illustrates thecommands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also candisplay an operation manual

bull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functionscan be executed in the NE-specific menu barbull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its mainpurpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the Data Windowbull IP address Window (for 2-WAY system only)The IP addresses for the respective opposite stations connected to DIR-ADIR-B aredisplayed in the IP address window Each selected station has a button which whenclicked enables the display mode for the respective connected device(s) to be switched fromDIR-A to DIR-B (or vice versa)The available display options areOpposite station is displayed blue backgroundOpposite station is not displayed or no opposite station is connected (IP address is displayedas rdquo000000000000rdquo) white backgroundbull Overall Status WindowThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for theNE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed herebull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the Data Windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data Windowbull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerROI-S06701- 6 -bull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pinkstatus value White disabled Gray maintenance YellowROI-S06701- 7 -Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT WindowCommonTool BarBlockDiagramNE-SpecificMenu BarLogin UserCommonMenu BarText Box

Command ButtonRadio ButtonTabsIP addressWindowOverallStatusWindowDataWindowTitle BarROI-S06701- 8 -22 Launching the PNMT ApplicationTo start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start 1048774 Programs 1048774 PNMTj 1048774 Pnmt then continue to the login windowNOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of yourcomputer once PNMT has startedROI-S06701- 9 -23 LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (refer to the table shown in section 231 User AccessPrivilege Levels) of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in thewindow depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may notbe carried outThe highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and networkmanagement systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login windowappears2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for therespective user4 For Connection select Dialup5 For Dialup Entry Name selectPNMT(USB)6 Click the [Login] button If you wish toexit the program click [Exit] buttonLogin UserROI-S06701- 10 -231 User Access Privilege Levels1048774 Available Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible Functions

Category ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminSYSTEM ALARM BUZZER - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONNECT (Remote Login) - - - 1048774 1048774EQUIPMENT (Wizard Setting) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETUP NE NAME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774NOTE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PROVISIONING CHANNEL SETTING CH USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE ERROR REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS GENERATED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E1 PORT IMPEDANCE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DXC CH Setting DXC Function - - 1048774 1048774 1048774BER THRESHOLD HIGH BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETTING LOW BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC ASSIGNMENT RS-232C-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN PORT SETTING PORTx USAGE(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) PORTx USAGE 1048774 1048774 1048774SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774FLOW CONTROL PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) FLOW CONTROL PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COLLISION REPORT PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) COLLISION REPORT PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LINK LOSS FORWARDING PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) LINK LOSS FORWARDINGPORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLOCK SOURCE SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 10487742M FRAMING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SUB SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MEDIA TYPE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE SPEED amp DUPLEX - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE LINK LOSS FORWARDING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE FLOW CONTROL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS ALS FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS INTERVAL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX POWER CTRL MTPC TX POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC THRESHOLD LEVEL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ADDITIONAL ATT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MAX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MIN) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

ROI-S06701- 11 -1048774 Available Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible FunctionsCategory ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminATPC POWER MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COMM ALARM MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION TX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774for TXRX SW RX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

RX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW CONDITION-XPIC RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION for APS APS MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SF - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SIGNAL DEGRADE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN COUNT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN DETECT TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN HOLD TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONDITIONLOCALFAIL XPIC CONDITION-LOCAL FAIL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF CONTROL TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN DEVICE RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTERx ALARM - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON PMON Threshold - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CTRL CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items that do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06701- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06701- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network

1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar of PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both theselected and its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE via remote accessROI-S06701- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Re-enter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to the PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06701- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new settingROI-S06701- 16 -28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo Refresh

Click Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06701- 17 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1 configuration)ROI-S06701- 18 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes the relevant license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this screen If you exchanging the license file click [Import] andadvance the following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06701- 19 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06701- 20 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06701- 21 -211 Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The Overall Status Window provides a snapshot ofthe most significant monitored items in the NEThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NEThis window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed hereThe following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1

bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or ManualTransmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1

bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1

bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2

bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 (OPTICAL) interface)bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODU

configuration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusWindowROI-S06701- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU(These monitored items are identical for PDH and SDH)ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredODU TypeMismatchIn NEOc ODU(CPV) connection mode this alarm isissued when the Modulation Scheme setting is notQPSK16QAMNoneTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter in the ODUit is issued when the transmission level decreases 3dB or more from the preset minimum ATPC levelNoneTX INPUT Indicates the status of the ODU input signal from theIDU it is issued when the input signal from the IDUis lostNoneRX LEVEL Indicates the status of the received RF signal levelof the ODU it is issued when the RF signal dropsbelow the RX thresholdNoneAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizer in the ODU itis issued when an anomaly occurs in the synthesizerNoneODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in the ODU it isissued when an anomaly occurs during CPUoperationNoneMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)NoneLO REF Indicates the status of the LO reference signal usedfor VH signal synchronization When the referencesignal in the ODU falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedfor XPICTCN-Rx LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for15 min alarmNoneTCN-Rx LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for

1 day alarmNoneTx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for transmitting signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standbyRx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for receiving signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathROI-S06701- 23 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulator-demodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomaly occurs in themodulator-demodulatorNoneMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properly mounted Ifthe MODEM contact is unplugged or if none ismounted (in accordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNoneMODEM TypeMismatchIndicates that CTRL FW Version (4xx) andMODEM Parameter Version (50 or higher) are notcompatible This alarm is also issued when noCompact MODEM is setNoneLOF Indicates the frame synchronization status If thesynchronization with DMR is lost this alarm isissuedNoneFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers of an NE and itsopposite are out of syncNoneHigh BER Indicates severe quality deterioration status If thesignal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthis alarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable threshold levels are 1E-31E-4 and 1E-5NoneROI-S06701- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLow BER Indicates low to moderate quality deterioration statusbetween radio sections When the signaldeteriorates below the present threshold value thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The selectable threshold values are 1E-6

1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status If the signaldeteriorates beyond the present threshold level thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The present threshold is a BER of 1E-9NoneMOD Indicates the operating status of the MOD If anyanomaly occurs in the modulator this alarm isissuedNoneDEM Indicates the operating status of the DEM If anyanomaly occurs in the demodulator this alarm isissuedNoneInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of the input powervoltage When there is an anomaly in the inputvoltage this alarm is issuedNonePower Supply Indicates the operating status of the power supplyWhen there is an anomaly in the power supply thisalarm is issuedNoneIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable between IDU andODU If a short circuit is caused between ODU andthe IDU this alarm is issuedNoneCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cable equalizer Thisalarm is issued when the equalizer function does notkick inNoneXIF Indicates the status of the XIF input signal of theMain Master IDU and Sub Master IDU When theXIF input signal falls below the threshold this alarmis issued and the XPIC function is resetfor XPICXPIC Status Indicates the status of XPIC operation When theXPIC function is reset ldquoResetrdquo is indicated and theldquoResetrdquo LED on the front panel is litfor XPICXREF Indicates the status of the CLK reference signalused for VH signal synchronization When there isan anomaly in the reference OSC in the MODEMhis alarm is issuedfor XPICLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizer functionOPR When the linearizer function is usedNO OPR When the linearizer function is not usedIn this case TX output power decreasesapprox 4 dBm from a standard valueNA When the ODU is used without linearizerfunctionNot available in QPSKModulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOcODU(CPV) connection modeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating status this alarm isissued when the linearizer is not properly operatingin the OPR stateNot available in QPSKmodulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOc

ODU(CPV) connection modeFading Status Indicates anomalies in signal strength this alarm isissued when signal is too weakNoneATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of the ATPC If theATPC is not properly functioning stop the controland maintain the TX output level at HOLD MIN(selectable)Only when ATPC is usedROI-S06701- 25 -214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interfacePDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the Main InterfaceIf any anomaly occurs in the INTFC (1) Module thisalarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (1)does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneInput LOS CH (1 ndash 48) Indicates the input status of the input E1 signal fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedOnly when CH USAGE is setas usedAIS received CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedAIS Received Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as usedDepending on whether theAIS Received Condition(Provisioning) is set toStatus or AlarmAIS generated CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedAIS Generated Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as used

ROI-S06701- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUsage Error CH(1 - 48)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interface WhenE1 signal is applied to the input interface as long asit is set to Not Used this alarm is generated Thisparameter is indicated only when CH Usage ErrorReport has been selectedCH Usage Error Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as not usedINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B) 1Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (in anychannel)NoneLAN Link Port (1-4) Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedLAN Collision Port(1-4)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-4)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-4)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at used1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYSDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC(1) does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the MAIN INTFC If

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

2207 TX Power CTRL772208 SW Condition782209 SW Condition (APS)7822010 Relay Configuration7922011 Cluster Alarm Input 7922012 EOW2 External Setting7922013 PMON Select8022014 Alarm Correlation Capability8022015 XPIC Condition - Local Fail80221 Link Performance Monitor812211 Viewing Summary Link Performance Monitor 812212 Threshold Setting832213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) window84222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) 852221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]862222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]882223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]91223 Event Log942231 Event Log monitor94224 Inventory Tab952241 Inventory Monitor 95Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)96Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)101ROI-S06701- 1 -Document Warranty1 The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice2 The PNMSPNMT screens in this manual are only examples Screens will vary accordingto equipment configurations equipment operation modes setting parametersPNMSPNMT application program version etc Screens contained in this manual arecurrent at the moment of publishing however they may differ slightly from the actualscreens on your PNMSPNMT3 This manual is written on the assumption that you already understand the restrictionslimitations and precautions necessary to operate the equipment properly Refer to therespective equipment manual for detailsROI-S06701- 2 -1 Getting Started11 IntroductionThe PNMT is a computer-based PASOLINK Network Management Terminal system

developed by NEC for management of NECrsquos PASOLINK wireless transmission networkThe PNMT is a scaled down version of PASOLINK Network Management System (PNMS)that is designed as a maintenance tool for field engineers to locally and remotely monitoralarms control points generate reports and archive data all within a familiar graphical userinterface and all in real time Throughout this manual ldquothe PNMTrdquo generally refers to themobile laptop computer in which the NEC PNMT software package (that interfaces andcontrols NEC PASOLINK series short haul wireless equipment) is installed inThis software package remotely monitors and controls the status and configuration of anentire PASOLINK network with associated equipment as well as the performance of theactual microwave radio links12 Conventions Used in This ManualFont What the Font Represents ExampleItalic For manual titles or relateddocument namesPlease refer to PASOLINKOperation Manual for detailsHostnameBoldItems on the user interfaceItems on the computer displayFile and directory namesThe Overall window[Button] Buttons in the user interface Click [OK] button to continueClick [Execute] button to sendcommandMenu Items A menu name followed by acolon () means that you mustselect the menu and then theitemWhen the item is followed byan arrow (1048774) a cascadingmenu followsSelect System 1048774 LoginLogoutltusernamegtA command variable wherethe user must make theappropriate entryThis is also commonly usedwhen asking for a passwordltpasswordgtKeycap Keyboard keys Press Enter keyROI-S06701- 3 -13 PNMT Communication Interfaces131 CommunicationsCommunications between the PNMT and the wireless network equipment is possiblebull via the LCT port of the equipment132 LCT Port InterfaceThe LCT port is located on the front of the equipmentPNMT ndash IDU ConnectionThe PNMT and the Control (CTRL) Module mounted in the IDU must be connected using astandard USB cable (the Type A plug is fitted into the Type A socket of the PNMT computerand the Type B plug is fitted into the Type B socket of the LCT Port on the IDU Control

(CTRL) Module)The LCT port has the following specificationsbull Connector type USB Type B (female)bull Bit per second rate 120024004800960019200 (default 19200)bull Stop bits 1bull Data bit length 8bull Parity no parityROI-S06701- 4 -14 Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEOPASOLINK NEO has four types of IDUbull 1+0 (Terminal)bull 1+1 (Hot Stand-by)bull 1+1 (Twin Path)bull 2-WAY 11+0 (Terminal)1+1 (Hot Stand-by) 1+1 (Twin Path) 2-WAY1 Only PDH supports 2-WAYHardware RequirementsRecommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz (or equivalent)bull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T (X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker15 Software Requirementsbull OS Windows 2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull Acrobat Readerbull PNMT Application softwareROI-S06701- 5 -2 System Operation amp MaintenanceThis chapter explains the menu structure and procedures for operating the PNMT Theexplanation uses typical PNMT screens to illustrate the hierarchy of menu21 The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate its titlebull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options illustrates thecommands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also candisplay an operation manual

bull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functionscan be executed in the NE-specific menu barbull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its mainpurpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the Data Windowbull IP address Window (for 2-WAY system only)The IP addresses for the respective opposite stations connected to DIR-ADIR-B aredisplayed in the IP address window Each selected station has a button which whenclicked enables the display mode for the respective connected device(s) to be switched fromDIR-A to DIR-B (or vice versa)The available display options areOpposite station is displayed blue backgroundOpposite station is not displayed or no opposite station is connected (IP address is displayedas rdquo000000000000rdquo) white backgroundbull Overall Status WindowThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for theNE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed herebull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the Data Windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data Windowbull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerROI-S06701- 6 -bull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pinkstatus value White disabled Gray maintenance YellowROI-S06701- 7 -Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT WindowCommonTool BarBlockDiagramNE-SpecificMenu BarLogin UserCommonMenu BarText Box

Command ButtonRadio ButtonTabsIP addressWindowOverallStatusWindowDataWindowTitle BarROI-S06701- 8 -22 Launching the PNMT ApplicationTo start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start 1048774 Programs 1048774 PNMTj 1048774 Pnmt then continue to the login windowNOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of yourcomputer once PNMT has startedROI-S06701- 9 -23 LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (refer to the table shown in section 231 User AccessPrivilege Levels) of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in thewindow depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may notbe carried outThe highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and networkmanagement systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login windowappears2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for therespective user4 For Connection select Dialup5 For Dialup Entry Name selectPNMT(USB)6 Click the [Login] button If you wish toexit the program click [Exit] buttonLogin UserROI-S06701- 10 -231 User Access Privilege Levels1048774 Available Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible Functions

Category ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminSYSTEM ALARM BUZZER - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONNECT (Remote Login) - - - 1048774 1048774EQUIPMENT (Wizard Setting) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETUP NE NAME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774NOTE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PROVISIONING CHANNEL SETTING CH USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE ERROR REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS GENERATED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E1 PORT IMPEDANCE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DXC CH Setting DXC Function - - 1048774 1048774 1048774BER THRESHOLD HIGH BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETTING LOW BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC ASSIGNMENT RS-232C-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN PORT SETTING PORTx USAGE(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) PORTx USAGE 1048774 1048774 1048774SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774FLOW CONTROL PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) FLOW CONTROL PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COLLISION REPORT PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) COLLISION REPORT PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LINK LOSS FORWARDING PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) LINK LOSS FORWARDINGPORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLOCK SOURCE SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 10487742M FRAMING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SUB SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MEDIA TYPE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE SPEED amp DUPLEX - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE LINK LOSS FORWARDING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE FLOW CONTROL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS ALS FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS INTERVAL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX POWER CTRL MTPC TX POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC THRESHOLD LEVEL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ADDITIONAL ATT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MAX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MIN) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

ROI-S06701- 11 -1048774 Available Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible FunctionsCategory ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminATPC POWER MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COMM ALARM MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION TX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774for TXRX SW RX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

RX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW CONDITION-XPIC RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION for APS APS MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SF - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SIGNAL DEGRADE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN COUNT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN DETECT TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN HOLD TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONDITIONLOCALFAIL XPIC CONDITION-LOCAL FAIL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF CONTROL TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN DEVICE RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTERx ALARM - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON PMON Threshold - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CTRL CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items that do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06701- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06701- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network

1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar of PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both theselected and its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE via remote accessROI-S06701- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Re-enter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to the PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06701- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new settingROI-S06701- 16 -28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo Refresh

Click Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06701- 17 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1 configuration)ROI-S06701- 18 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes the relevant license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this screen If you exchanging the license file click [Import] andadvance the following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06701- 19 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06701- 20 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06701- 21 -211 Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The Overall Status Window provides a snapshot ofthe most significant monitored items in the NEThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NEThis window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed hereThe following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1

bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or ManualTransmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1

bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1

bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2

bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 (OPTICAL) interface)bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODU

configuration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusWindowROI-S06701- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU(These monitored items are identical for PDH and SDH)ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredODU TypeMismatchIn NEOc ODU(CPV) connection mode this alarm isissued when the Modulation Scheme setting is notQPSK16QAMNoneTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter in the ODUit is issued when the transmission level decreases 3dB or more from the preset minimum ATPC levelNoneTX INPUT Indicates the status of the ODU input signal from theIDU it is issued when the input signal from the IDUis lostNoneRX LEVEL Indicates the status of the received RF signal levelof the ODU it is issued when the RF signal dropsbelow the RX thresholdNoneAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizer in the ODU itis issued when an anomaly occurs in the synthesizerNoneODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in the ODU it isissued when an anomaly occurs during CPUoperationNoneMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)NoneLO REF Indicates the status of the LO reference signal usedfor VH signal synchronization When the referencesignal in the ODU falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedfor XPICTCN-Rx LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for15 min alarmNoneTCN-Rx LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for

1 day alarmNoneTx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for transmitting signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standbyRx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for receiving signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathROI-S06701- 23 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulator-demodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomaly occurs in themodulator-demodulatorNoneMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properly mounted Ifthe MODEM contact is unplugged or if none ismounted (in accordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNoneMODEM TypeMismatchIndicates that CTRL FW Version (4xx) andMODEM Parameter Version (50 or higher) are notcompatible This alarm is also issued when noCompact MODEM is setNoneLOF Indicates the frame synchronization status If thesynchronization with DMR is lost this alarm isissuedNoneFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers of an NE and itsopposite are out of syncNoneHigh BER Indicates severe quality deterioration status If thesignal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthis alarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable threshold levels are 1E-31E-4 and 1E-5NoneROI-S06701- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLow BER Indicates low to moderate quality deterioration statusbetween radio sections When the signaldeteriorates below the present threshold value thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The selectable threshold values are 1E-6

1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status If the signaldeteriorates beyond the present threshold level thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The present threshold is a BER of 1E-9NoneMOD Indicates the operating status of the MOD If anyanomaly occurs in the modulator this alarm isissuedNoneDEM Indicates the operating status of the DEM If anyanomaly occurs in the demodulator this alarm isissuedNoneInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of the input powervoltage When there is an anomaly in the inputvoltage this alarm is issuedNonePower Supply Indicates the operating status of the power supplyWhen there is an anomaly in the power supply thisalarm is issuedNoneIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable between IDU andODU If a short circuit is caused between ODU andthe IDU this alarm is issuedNoneCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cable equalizer Thisalarm is issued when the equalizer function does notkick inNoneXIF Indicates the status of the XIF input signal of theMain Master IDU and Sub Master IDU When theXIF input signal falls below the threshold this alarmis issued and the XPIC function is resetfor XPICXPIC Status Indicates the status of XPIC operation When theXPIC function is reset ldquoResetrdquo is indicated and theldquoResetrdquo LED on the front panel is litfor XPICXREF Indicates the status of the CLK reference signalused for VH signal synchronization When there isan anomaly in the reference OSC in the MODEMhis alarm is issuedfor XPICLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizer functionOPR When the linearizer function is usedNO OPR When the linearizer function is not usedIn this case TX output power decreasesapprox 4 dBm from a standard valueNA When the ODU is used without linearizerfunctionNot available in QPSKModulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOcODU(CPV) connection modeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating status this alarm isissued when the linearizer is not properly operatingin the OPR stateNot available in QPSKmodulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOc

ODU(CPV) connection modeFading Status Indicates anomalies in signal strength this alarm isissued when signal is too weakNoneATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of the ATPC If theATPC is not properly functioning stop the controland maintain the TX output level at HOLD MIN(selectable)Only when ATPC is usedROI-S06701- 25 -214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interfacePDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the Main InterfaceIf any anomaly occurs in the INTFC (1) Module thisalarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (1)does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneInput LOS CH (1 ndash 48) Indicates the input status of the input E1 signal fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedOnly when CH USAGE is setas usedAIS received CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedAIS Received Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as usedDepending on whether theAIS Received Condition(Provisioning) is set toStatus or AlarmAIS generated CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedAIS Generated Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as used

ROI-S06701- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUsage Error CH(1 - 48)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interface WhenE1 signal is applied to the input interface as long asit is set to Not Used this alarm is generated Thisparameter is indicated only when CH Usage ErrorReport has been selectedCH Usage Error Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as not usedINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B) 1Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (in anychannel)NoneLAN Link Port (1-4) Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedLAN Collision Port(1-4)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-4)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-4)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at used1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYSDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC(1) does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the MAIN INTFC If

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

developed by NEC for management of NECrsquos PASOLINK wireless transmission networkThe PNMT is a scaled down version of PASOLINK Network Management System (PNMS)that is designed as a maintenance tool for field engineers to locally and remotely monitoralarms control points generate reports and archive data all within a familiar graphical userinterface and all in real time Throughout this manual ldquothe PNMTrdquo generally refers to themobile laptop computer in which the NEC PNMT software package (that interfaces andcontrols NEC PASOLINK series short haul wireless equipment) is installed inThis software package remotely monitors and controls the status and configuration of anentire PASOLINK network with associated equipment as well as the performance of theactual microwave radio links12 Conventions Used in This ManualFont What the Font Represents ExampleItalic For manual titles or relateddocument namesPlease refer to PASOLINKOperation Manual for detailsHostnameBoldItems on the user interfaceItems on the computer displayFile and directory namesThe Overall window[Button] Buttons in the user interface Click [OK] button to continueClick [Execute] button to sendcommandMenu Items A menu name followed by acolon () means that you mustselect the menu and then theitemWhen the item is followed byan arrow (1048774) a cascadingmenu followsSelect System 1048774 LoginLogoutltusernamegtA command variable wherethe user must make theappropriate entryThis is also commonly usedwhen asking for a passwordltpasswordgtKeycap Keyboard keys Press Enter keyROI-S06701- 3 -13 PNMT Communication Interfaces131 CommunicationsCommunications between the PNMT and the wireless network equipment is possiblebull via the LCT port of the equipment132 LCT Port InterfaceThe LCT port is located on the front of the equipmentPNMT ndash IDU ConnectionThe PNMT and the Control (CTRL) Module mounted in the IDU must be connected using astandard USB cable (the Type A plug is fitted into the Type A socket of the PNMT computerand the Type B plug is fitted into the Type B socket of the LCT Port on the IDU Control

(CTRL) Module)The LCT port has the following specificationsbull Connector type USB Type B (female)bull Bit per second rate 120024004800960019200 (default 19200)bull Stop bits 1bull Data bit length 8bull Parity no parityROI-S06701- 4 -14 Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEOPASOLINK NEO has four types of IDUbull 1+0 (Terminal)bull 1+1 (Hot Stand-by)bull 1+1 (Twin Path)bull 2-WAY 11+0 (Terminal)1+1 (Hot Stand-by) 1+1 (Twin Path) 2-WAY1 Only PDH supports 2-WAYHardware RequirementsRecommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz (or equivalent)bull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T (X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker15 Software Requirementsbull OS Windows 2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull Acrobat Readerbull PNMT Application softwareROI-S06701- 5 -2 System Operation amp MaintenanceThis chapter explains the menu structure and procedures for operating the PNMT Theexplanation uses typical PNMT screens to illustrate the hierarchy of menu21 The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate its titlebull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options illustrates thecommands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also candisplay an operation manual

bull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functionscan be executed in the NE-specific menu barbull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its mainpurpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the Data Windowbull IP address Window (for 2-WAY system only)The IP addresses for the respective opposite stations connected to DIR-ADIR-B aredisplayed in the IP address window Each selected station has a button which whenclicked enables the display mode for the respective connected device(s) to be switched fromDIR-A to DIR-B (or vice versa)The available display options areOpposite station is displayed blue backgroundOpposite station is not displayed or no opposite station is connected (IP address is displayedas rdquo000000000000rdquo) white backgroundbull Overall Status WindowThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for theNE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed herebull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the Data Windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data Windowbull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerROI-S06701- 6 -bull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pinkstatus value White disabled Gray maintenance YellowROI-S06701- 7 -Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT WindowCommonTool BarBlockDiagramNE-SpecificMenu BarLogin UserCommonMenu BarText Box

Command ButtonRadio ButtonTabsIP addressWindowOverallStatusWindowDataWindowTitle BarROI-S06701- 8 -22 Launching the PNMT ApplicationTo start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start 1048774 Programs 1048774 PNMTj 1048774 Pnmt then continue to the login windowNOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of yourcomputer once PNMT has startedROI-S06701- 9 -23 LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (refer to the table shown in section 231 User AccessPrivilege Levels) of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in thewindow depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may notbe carried outThe highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and networkmanagement systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login windowappears2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for therespective user4 For Connection select Dialup5 For Dialup Entry Name selectPNMT(USB)6 Click the [Login] button If you wish toexit the program click [Exit] buttonLogin UserROI-S06701- 10 -231 User Access Privilege Levels1048774 Available Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible Functions

Category ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminSYSTEM ALARM BUZZER - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONNECT (Remote Login) - - - 1048774 1048774EQUIPMENT (Wizard Setting) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETUP NE NAME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774NOTE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PROVISIONING CHANNEL SETTING CH USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE ERROR REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS GENERATED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E1 PORT IMPEDANCE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DXC CH Setting DXC Function - - 1048774 1048774 1048774BER THRESHOLD HIGH BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETTING LOW BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC ASSIGNMENT RS-232C-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN PORT SETTING PORTx USAGE(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) PORTx USAGE 1048774 1048774 1048774SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774FLOW CONTROL PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) FLOW CONTROL PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COLLISION REPORT PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) COLLISION REPORT PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LINK LOSS FORWARDING PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) LINK LOSS FORWARDINGPORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLOCK SOURCE SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 10487742M FRAMING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SUB SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MEDIA TYPE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE SPEED amp DUPLEX - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE LINK LOSS FORWARDING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE FLOW CONTROL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS ALS FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS INTERVAL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX POWER CTRL MTPC TX POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC THRESHOLD LEVEL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ADDITIONAL ATT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MAX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MIN) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

ROI-S06701- 11 -1048774 Available Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible FunctionsCategory ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminATPC POWER MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COMM ALARM MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION TX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774for TXRX SW RX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

RX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW CONDITION-XPIC RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION for APS APS MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SF - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SIGNAL DEGRADE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN COUNT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN DETECT TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN HOLD TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONDITIONLOCALFAIL XPIC CONDITION-LOCAL FAIL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF CONTROL TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN DEVICE RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTERx ALARM - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON PMON Threshold - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CTRL CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items that do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06701- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06701- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network

1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar of PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both theselected and its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE via remote accessROI-S06701- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Re-enter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to the PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06701- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new settingROI-S06701- 16 -28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo Refresh

Click Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06701- 17 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1 configuration)ROI-S06701- 18 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes the relevant license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this screen If you exchanging the license file click [Import] andadvance the following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06701- 19 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06701- 20 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06701- 21 -211 Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The Overall Status Window provides a snapshot ofthe most significant monitored items in the NEThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NEThis window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed hereThe following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1

bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or ManualTransmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1

bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1

bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2

bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 (OPTICAL) interface)bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODU

configuration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusWindowROI-S06701- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU(These monitored items are identical for PDH and SDH)ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredODU TypeMismatchIn NEOc ODU(CPV) connection mode this alarm isissued when the Modulation Scheme setting is notQPSK16QAMNoneTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter in the ODUit is issued when the transmission level decreases 3dB or more from the preset minimum ATPC levelNoneTX INPUT Indicates the status of the ODU input signal from theIDU it is issued when the input signal from the IDUis lostNoneRX LEVEL Indicates the status of the received RF signal levelof the ODU it is issued when the RF signal dropsbelow the RX thresholdNoneAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizer in the ODU itis issued when an anomaly occurs in the synthesizerNoneODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in the ODU it isissued when an anomaly occurs during CPUoperationNoneMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)NoneLO REF Indicates the status of the LO reference signal usedfor VH signal synchronization When the referencesignal in the ODU falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedfor XPICTCN-Rx LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for15 min alarmNoneTCN-Rx LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for

1 day alarmNoneTx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for transmitting signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standbyRx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for receiving signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathROI-S06701- 23 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulator-demodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomaly occurs in themodulator-demodulatorNoneMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properly mounted Ifthe MODEM contact is unplugged or if none ismounted (in accordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNoneMODEM TypeMismatchIndicates that CTRL FW Version (4xx) andMODEM Parameter Version (50 or higher) are notcompatible This alarm is also issued when noCompact MODEM is setNoneLOF Indicates the frame synchronization status If thesynchronization with DMR is lost this alarm isissuedNoneFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers of an NE and itsopposite are out of syncNoneHigh BER Indicates severe quality deterioration status If thesignal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthis alarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable threshold levels are 1E-31E-4 and 1E-5NoneROI-S06701- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLow BER Indicates low to moderate quality deterioration statusbetween radio sections When the signaldeteriorates below the present threshold value thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The selectable threshold values are 1E-6

1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status If the signaldeteriorates beyond the present threshold level thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The present threshold is a BER of 1E-9NoneMOD Indicates the operating status of the MOD If anyanomaly occurs in the modulator this alarm isissuedNoneDEM Indicates the operating status of the DEM If anyanomaly occurs in the demodulator this alarm isissuedNoneInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of the input powervoltage When there is an anomaly in the inputvoltage this alarm is issuedNonePower Supply Indicates the operating status of the power supplyWhen there is an anomaly in the power supply thisalarm is issuedNoneIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable between IDU andODU If a short circuit is caused between ODU andthe IDU this alarm is issuedNoneCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cable equalizer Thisalarm is issued when the equalizer function does notkick inNoneXIF Indicates the status of the XIF input signal of theMain Master IDU and Sub Master IDU When theXIF input signal falls below the threshold this alarmis issued and the XPIC function is resetfor XPICXPIC Status Indicates the status of XPIC operation When theXPIC function is reset ldquoResetrdquo is indicated and theldquoResetrdquo LED on the front panel is litfor XPICXREF Indicates the status of the CLK reference signalused for VH signal synchronization When there isan anomaly in the reference OSC in the MODEMhis alarm is issuedfor XPICLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizer functionOPR When the linearizer function is usedNO OPR When the linearizer function is not usedIn this case TX output power decreasesapprox 4 dBm from a standard valueNA When the ODU is used without linearizerfunctionNot available in QPSKModulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOcODU(CPV) connection modeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating status this alarm isissued when the linearizer is not properly operatingin the OPR stateNot available in QPSKmodulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOc

ODU(CPV) connection modeFading Status Indicates anomalies in signal strength this alarm isissued when signal is too weakNoneATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of the ATPC If theATPC is not properly functioning stop the controland maintain the TX output level at HOLD MIN(selectable)Only when ATPC is usedROI-S06701- 25 -214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interfacePDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the Main InterfaceIf any anomaly occurs in the INTFC (1) Module thisalarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (1)does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneInput LOS CH (1 ndash 48) Indicates the input status of the input E1 signal fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedOnly when CH USAGE is setas usedAIS received CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedAIS Received Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as usedDepending on whether theAIS Received Condition(Provisioning) is set toStatus or AlarmAIS generated CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedAIS Generated Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as used

ROI-S06701- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUsage Error CH(1 - 48)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interface WhenE1 signal is applied to the input interface as long asit is set to Not Used this alarm is generated Thisparameter is indicated only when CH Usage ErrorReport has been selectedCH Usage Error Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as not usedINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B) 1Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (in anychannel)NoneLAN Link Port (1-4) Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedLAN Collision Port(1-4)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-4)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-4)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at used1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYSDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC(1) does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the MAIN INTFC If

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

(CTRL) Module)The LCT port has the following specificationsbull Connector type USB Type B (female)bull Bit per second rate 120024004800960019200 (default 19200)bull Stop bits 1bull Data bit length 8bull Parity no parityROI-S06701- 4 -14 Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEOPASOLINK NEO has four types of IDUbull 1+0 (Terminal)bull 1+1 (Hot Stand-by)bull 1+1 (Twin Path)bull 2-WAY 11+0 (Terminal)1+1 (Hot Stand-by) 1+1 (Twin Path) 2-WAY1 Only PDH supports 2-WAYHardware RequirementsRecommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz (or equivalent)bull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T (X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker15 Software Requirementsbull OS Windows 2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull Acrobat Readerbull PNMT Application softwareROI-S06701- 5 -2 System Operation amp MaintenanceThis chapter explains the menu structure and procedures for operating the PNMT Theexplanation uses typical PNMT screens to illustrate the hierarchy of menu21 The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate its titlebull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options illustrates thecommands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also candisplay an operation manual

bull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functionscan be executed in the NE-specific menu barbull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its mainpurpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the Data Windowbull IP address Window (for 2-WAY system only)The IP addresses for the respective opposite stations connected to DIR-ADIR-B aredisplayed in the IP address window Each selected station has a button which whenclicked enables the display mode for the respective connected device(s) to be switched fromDIR-A to DIR-B (or vice versa)The available display options areOpposite station is displayed blue backgroundOpposite station is not displayed or no opposite station is connected (IP address is displayedas rdquo000000000000rdquo) white backgroundbull Overall Status WindowThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for theNE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed herebull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the Data Windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data Windowbull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerROI-S06701- 6 -bull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pinkstatus value White disabled Gray maintenance YellowROI-S06701- 7 -Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT WindowCommonTool BarBlockDiagramNE-SpecificMenu BarLogin UserCommonMenu BarText Box

Command ButtonRadio ButtonTabsIP addressWindowOverallStatusWindowDataWindowTitle BarROI-S06701- 8 -22 Launching the PNMT ApplicationTo start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start 1048774 Programs 1048774 PNMTj 1048774 Pnmt then continue to the login windowNOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of yourcomputer once PNMT has startedROI-S06701- 9 -23 LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (refer to the table shown in section 231 User AccessPrivilege Levels) of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in thewindow depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may notbe carried outThe highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and networkmanagement systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login windowappears2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for therespective user4 For Connection select Dialup5 For Dialup Entry Name selectPNMT(USB)6 Click the [Login] button If you wish toexit the program click [Exit] buttonLogin UserROI-S06701- 10 -231 User Access Privilege Levels1048774 Available Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible Functions

Category ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminSYSTEM ALARM BUZZER - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONNECT (Remote Login) - - - 1048774 1048774EQUIPMENT (Wizard Setting) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETUP NE NAME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774NOTE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PROVISIONING CHANNEL SETTING CH USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE ERROR REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS GENERATED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E1 PORT IMPEDANCE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DXC CH Setting DXC Function - - 1048774 1048774 1048774BER THRESHOLD HIGH BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETTING LOW BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC ASSIGNMENT RS-232C-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN PORT SETTING PORTx USAGE(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) PORTx USAGE 1048774 1048774 1048774SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774FLOW CONTROL PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) FLOW CONTROL PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COLLISION REPORT PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) COLLISION REPORT PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LINK LOSS FORWARDING PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) LINK LOSS FORWARDINGPORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLOCK SOURCE SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 10487742M FRAMING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SUB SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MEDIA TYPE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE SPEED amp DUPLEX - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE LINK LOSS FORWARDING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE FLOW CONTROL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS ALS FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS INTERVAL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX POWER CTRL MTPC TX POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC THRESHOLD LEVEL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ADDITIONAL ATT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MAX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MIN) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

ROI-S06701- 11 -1048774 Available Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible FunctionsCategory ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminATPC POWER MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COMM ALARM MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION TX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774for TXRX SW RX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

RX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW CONDITION-XPIC RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION for APS APS MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SF - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SIGNAL DEGRADE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN COUNT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN DETECT TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN HOLD TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONDITIONLOCALFAIL XPIC CONDITION-LOCAL FAIL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF CONTROL TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN DEVICE RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTERx ALARM - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON PMON Threshold - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CTRL CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items that do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06701- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06701- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network

1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar of PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both theselected and its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE via remote accessROI-S06701- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Re-enter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to the PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06701- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new settingROI-S06701- 16 -28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo Refresh

Click Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06701- 17 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1 configuration)ROI-S06701- 18 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes the relevant license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this screen If you exchanging the license file click [Import] andadvance the following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06701- 19 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06701- 20 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06701- 21 -211 Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The Overall Status Window provides a snapshot ofthe most significant monitored items in the NEThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NEThis window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed hereThe following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1

bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or ManualTransmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1

bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1

bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2

bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 (OPTICAL) interface)bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODU

configuration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusWindowROI-S06701- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU(These monitored items are identical for PDH and SDH)ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredODU TypeMismatchIn NEOc ODU(CPV) connection mode this alarm isissued when the Modulation Scheme setting is notQPSK16QAMNoneTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter in the ODUit is issued when the transmission level decreases 3dB or more from the preset minimum ATPC levelNoneTX INPUT Indicates the status of the ODU input signal from theIDU it is issued when the input signal from the IDUis lostNoneRX LEVEL Indicates the status of the received RF signal levelof the ODU it is issued when the RF signal dropsbelow the RX thresholdNoneAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizer in the ODU itis issued when an anomaly occurs in the synthesizerNoneODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in the ODU it isissued when an anomaly occurs during CPUoperationNoneMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)NoneLO REF Indicates the status of the LO reference signal usedfor VH signal synchronization When the referencesignal in the ODU falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedfor XPICTCN-Rx LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for15 min alarmNoneTCN-Rx LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for

1 day alarmNoneTx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for transmitting signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standbyRx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for receiving signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathROI-S06701- 23 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulator-demodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomaly occurs in themodulator-demodulatorNoneMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properly mounted Ifthe MODEM contact is unplugged or if none ismounted (in accordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNoneMODEM TypeMismatchIndicates that CTRL FW Version (4xx) andMODEM Parameter Version (50 or higher) are notcompatible This alarm is also issued when noCompact MODEM is setNoneLOF Indicates the frame synchronization status If thesynchronization with DMR is lost this alarm isissuedNoneFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers of an NE and itsopposite are out of syncNoneHigh BER Indicates severe quality deterioration status If thesignal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthis alarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable threshold levels are 1E-31E-4 and 1E-5NoneROI-S06701- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLow BER Indicates low to moderate quality deterioration statusbetween radio sections When the signaldeteriorates below the present threshold value thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The selectable threshold values are 1E-6

1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status If the signaldeteriorates beyond the present threshold level thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The present threshold is a BER of 1E-9NoneMOD Indicates the operating status of the MOD If anyanomaly occurs in the modulator this alarm isissuedNoneDEM Indicates the operating status of the DEM If anyanomaly occurs in the demodulator this alarm isissuedNoneInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of the input powervoltage When there is an anomaly in the inputvoltage this alarm is issuedNonePower Supply Indicates the operating status of the power supplyWhen there is an anomaly in the power supply thisalarm is issuedNoneIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable between IDU andODU If a short circuit is caused between ODU andthe IDU this alarm is issuedNoneCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cable equalizer Thisalarm is issued when the equalizer function does notkick inNoneXIF Indicates the status of the XIF input signal of theMain Master IDU and Sub Master IDU When theXIF input signal falls below the threshold this alarmis issued and the XPIC function is resetfor XPICXPIC Status Indicates the status of XPIC operation When theXPIC function is reset ldquoResetrdquo is indicated and theldquoResetrdquo LED on the front panel is litfor XPICXREF Indicates the status of the CLK reference signalused for VH signal synchronization When there isan anomaly in the reference OSC in the MODEMhis alarm is issuedfor XPICLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizer functionOPR When the linearizer function is usedNO OPR When the linearizer function is not usedIn this case TX output power decreasesapprox 4 dBm from a standard valueNA When the ODU is used without linearizerfunctionNot available in QPSKModulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOcODU(CPV) connection modeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating status this alarm isissued when the linearizer is not properly operatingin the OPR stateNot available in QPSKmodulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOc

ODU(CPV) connection modeFading Status Indicates anomalies in signal strength this alarm isissued when signal is too weakNoneATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of the ATPC If theATPC is not properly functioning stop the controland maintain the TX output level at HOLD MIN(selectable)Only when ATPC is usedROI-S06701- 25 -214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interfacePDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the Main InterfaceIf any anomaly occurs in the INTFC (1) Module thisalarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (1)does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneInput LOS CH (1 ndash 48) Indicates the input status of the input E1 signal fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedOnly when CH USAGE is setas usedAIS received CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedAIS Received Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as usedDepending on whether theAIS Received Condition(Provisioning) is set toStatus or AlarmAIS generated CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedAIS Generated Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as used

ROI-S06701- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUsage Error CH(1 - 48)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interface WhenE1 signal is applied to the input interface as long asit is set to Not Used this alarm is generated Thisparameter is indicated only when CH Usage ErrorReport has been selectedCH Usage Error Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as not usedINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B) 1Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (in anychannel)NoneLAN Link Port (1-4) Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedLAN Collision Port(1-4)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-4)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-4)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at used1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYSDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC(1) does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the MAIN INTFC If

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

bull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functionscan be executed in the NE-specific menu barbull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its mainpurpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the Data Windowbull IP address Window (for 2-WAY system only)The IP addresses for the respective opposite stations connected to DIR-ADIR-B aredisplayed in the IP address window Each selected station has a button which whenclicked enables the display mode for the respective connected device(s) to be switched fromDIR-A to DIR-B (or vice versa)The available display options areOpposite station is displayed blue backgroundOpposite station is not displayed or no opposite station is connected (IP address is displayedas rdquo000000000000rdquo) white backgroundbull Overall Status WindowThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for theNE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed herebull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the Data Windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data Windowbull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerROI-S06701- 6 -bull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pinkstatus value White disabled Gray maintenance YellowROI-S06701- 7 -Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT WindowCommonTool BarBlockDiagramNE-SpecificMenu BarLogin UserCommonMenu BarText Box

Command ButtonRadio ButtonTabsIP addressWindowOverallStatusWindowDataWindowTitle BarROI-S06701- 8 -22 Launching the PNMT ApplicationTo start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start 1048774 Programs 1048774 PNMTj 1048774 Pnmt then continue to the login windowNOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of yourcomputer once PNMT has startedROI-S06701- 9 -23 LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (refer to the table shown in section 231 User AccessPrivilege Levels) of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in thewindow depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may notbe carried outThe highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and networkmanagement systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login windowappears2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for therespective user4 For Connection select Dialup5 For Dialup Entry Name selectPNMT(USB)6 Click the [Login] button If you wish toexit the program click [Exit] buttonLogin UserROI-S06701- 10 -231 User Access Privilege Levels1048774 Available Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible Functions

Category ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminSYSTEM ALARM BUZZER - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONNECT (Remote Login) - - - 1048774 1048774EQUIPMENT (Wizard Setting) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETUP NE NAME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774NOTE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PROVISIONING CHANNEL SETTING CH USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE ERROR REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS GENERATED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E1 PORT IMPEDANCE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DXC CH Setting DXC Function - - 1048774 1048774 1048774BER THRESHOLD HIGH BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETTING LOW BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC ASSIGNMENT RS-232C-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN PORT SETTING PORTx USAGE(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) PORTx USAGE 1048774 1048774 1048774SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774FLOW CONTROL PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) FLOW CONTROL PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COLLISION REPORT PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) COLLISION REPORT PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LINK LOSS FORWARDING PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) LINK LOSS FORWARDINGPORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLOCK SOURCE SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 10487742M FRAMING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SUB SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MEDIA TYPE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE SPEED amp DUPLEX - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE LINK LOSS FORWARDING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE FLOW CONTROL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS ALS FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS INTERVAL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX POWER CTRL MTPC TX POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC THRESHOLD LEVEL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ADDITIONAL ATT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MAX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MIN) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

ROI-S06701- 11 -1048774 Available Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible FunctionsCategory ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminATPC POWER MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COMM ALARM MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION TX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774for TXRX SW RX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

RX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW CONDITION-XPIC RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION for APS APS MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SF - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SIGNAL DEGRADE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN COUNT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN DETECT TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN HOLD TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONDITIONLOCALFAIL XPIC CONDITION-LOCAL FAIL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF CONTROL TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN DEVICE RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTERx ALARM - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON PMON Threshold - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CTRL CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items that do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06701- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06701- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network

1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar of PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both theselected and its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE via remote accessROI-S06701- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Re-enter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to the PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06701- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new settingROI-S06701- 16 -28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo Refresh

Click Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06701- 17 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1 configuration)ROI-S06701- 18 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes the relevant license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this screen If you exchanging the license file click [Import] andadvance the following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06701- 19 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06701- 20 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06701- 21 -211 Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The Overall Status Window provides a snapshot ofthe most significant monitored items in the NEThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NEThis window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed hereThe following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1

bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or ManualTransmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1

bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1

bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2

bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 (OPTICAL) interface)bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODU

configuration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusWindowROI-S06701- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU(These monitored items are identical for PDH and SDH)ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredODU TypeMismatchIn NEOc ODU(CPV) connection mode this alarm isissued when the Modulation Scheme setting is notQPSK16QAMNoneTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter in the ODUit is issued when the transmission level decreases 3dB or more from the preset minimum ATPC levelNoneTX INPUT Indicates the status of the ODU input signal from theIDU it is issued when the input signal from the IDUis lostNoneRX LEVEL Indicates the status of the received RF signal levelof the ODU it is issued when the RF signal dropsbelow the RX thresholdNoneAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizer in the ODU itis issued when an anomaly occurs in the synthesizerNoneODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in the ODU it isissued when an anomaly occurs during CPUoperationNoneMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)NoneLO REF Indicates the status of the LO reference signal usedfor VH signal synchronization When the referencesignal in the ODU falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedfor XPICTCN-Rx LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for15 min alarmNoneTCN-Rx LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for

1 day alarmNoneTx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for transmitting signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standbyRx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for receiving signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathROI-S06701- 23 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulator-demodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomaly occurs in themodulator-demodulatorNoneMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properly mounted Ifthe MODEM contact is unplugged or if none ismounted (in accordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNoneMODEM TypeMismatchIndicates that CTRL FW Version (4xx) andMODEM Parameter Version (50 or higher) are notcompatible This alarm is also issued when noCompact MODEM is setNoneLOF Indicates the frame synchronization status If thesynchronization with DMR is lost this alarm isissuedNoneFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers of an NE and itsopposite are out of syncNoneHigh BER Indicates severe quality deterioration status If thesignal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthis alarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable threshold levels are 1E-31E-4 and 1E-5NoneROI-S06701- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLow BER Indicates low to moderate quality deterioration statusbetween radio sections When the signaldeteriorates below the present threshold value thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The selectable threshold values are 1E-6

1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status If the signaldeteriorates beyond the present threshold level thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The present threshold is a BER of 1E-9NoneMOD Indicates the operating status of the MOD If anyanomaly occurs in the modulator this alarm isissuedNoneDEM Indicates the operating status of the DEM If anyanomaly occurs in the demodulator this alarm isissuedNoneInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of the input powervoltage When there is an anomaly in the inputvoltage this alarm is issuedNonePower Supply Indicates the operating status of the power supplyWhen there is an anomaly in the power supply thisalarm is issuedNoneIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable between IDU andODU If a short circuit is caused between ODU andthe IDU this alarm is issuedNoneCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cable equalizer Thisalarm is issued when the equalizer function does notkick inNoneXIF Indicates the status of the XIF input signal of theMain Master IDU and Sub Master IDU When theXIF input signal falls below the threshold this alarmis issued and the XPIC function is resetfor XPICXPIC Status Indicates the status of XPIC operation When theXPIC function is reset ldquoResetrdquo is indicated and theldquoResetrdquo LED on the front panel is litfor XPICXREF Indicates the status of the CLK reference signalused for VH signal synchronization When there isan anomaly in the reference OSC in the MODEMhis alarm is issuedfor XPICLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizer functionOPR When the linearizer function is usedNO OPR When the linearizer function is not usedIn this case TX output power decreasesapprox 4 dBm from a standard valueNA When the ODU is used without linearizerfunctionNot available in QPSKModulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOcODU(CPV) connection modeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating status this alarm isissued when the linearizer is not properly operatingin the OPR stateNot available in QPSKmodulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOc

ODU(CPV) connection modeFading Status Indicates anomalies in signal strength this alarm isissued when signal is too weakNoneATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of the ATPC If theATPC is not properly functioning stop the controland maintain the TX output level at HOLD MIN(selectable)Only when ATPC is usedROI-S06701- 25 -214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interfacePDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the Main InterfaceIf any anomaly occurs in the INTFC (1) Module thisalarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (1)does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneInput LOS CH (1 ndash 48) Indicates the input status of the input E1 signal fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedOnly when CH USAGE is setas usedAIS received CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedAIS Received Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as usedDepending on whether theAIS Received Condition(Provisioning) is set toStatus or AlarmAIS generated CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedAIS Generated Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as used

ROI-S06701- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUsage Error CH(1 - 48)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interface WhenE1 signal is applied to the input interface as long asit is set to Not Used this alarm is generated Thisparameter is indicated only when CH Usage ErrorReport has been selectedCH Usage Error Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as not usedINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B) 1Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (in anychannel)NoneLAN Link Port (1-4) Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedLAN Collision Port(1-4)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-4)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-4)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at used1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYSDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC(1) does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the MAIN INTFC If

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

Command ButtonRadio ButtonTabsIP addressWindowOverallStatusWindowDataWindowTitle BarROI-S06701- 8 -22 Launching the PNMT ApplicationTo start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start 1048774 Programs 1048774 PNMTj 1048774 Pnmt then continue to the login windowNOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of yourcomputer once PNMT has startedROI-S06701- 9 -23 LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (refer to the table shown in section 231 User AccessPrivilege Levels) of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in thewindow depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may notbe carried outThe highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and networkmanagement systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login windowappears2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for therespective user4 For Connection select Dialup5 For Dialup Entry Name selectPNMT(USB)6 Click the [Login] button If you wish toexit the program click [Exit] buttonLogin UserROI-S06701- 10 -231 User Access Privilege Levels1048774 Available Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible Functions

Category ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminSYSTEM ALARM BUZZER - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONNECT (Remote Login) - - - 1048774 1048774EQUIPMENT (Wizard Setting) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETUP NE NAME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774NOTE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PROVISIONING CHANNEL SETTING CH USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE ERROR REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS GENERATED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E1 PORT IMPEDANCE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DXC CH Setting DXC Function - - 1048774 1048774 1048774BER THRESHOLD HIGH BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETTING LOW BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC ASSIGNMENT RS-232C-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN PORT SETTING PORTx USAGE(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) PORTx USAGE 1048774 1048774 1048774SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774FLOW CONTROL PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) FLOW CONTROL PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COLLISION REPORT PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) COLLISION REPORT PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LINK LOSS FORWARDING PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) LINK LOSS FORWARDINGPORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLOCK SOURCE SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 10487742M FRAMING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SUB SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MEDIA TYPE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE SPEED amp DUPLEX - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE LINK LOSS FORWARDING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE FLOW CONTROL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS ALS FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS INTERVAL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX POWER CTRL MTPC TX POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC THRESHOLD LEVEL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ADDITIONAL ATT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MAX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MIN) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

ROI-S06701- 11 -1048774 Available Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible FunctionsCategory ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminATPC POWER MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COMM ALARM MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION TX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774for TXRX SW RX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

RX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW CONDITION-XPIC RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION for APS APS MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SF - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SIGNAL DEGRADE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN COUNT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN DETECT TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN HOLD TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONDITIONLOCALFAIL XPIC CONDITION-LOCAL FAIL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF CONTROL TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN DEVICE RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTERx ALARM - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON PMON Threshold - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CTRL CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items that do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06701- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06701- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network

1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar of PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both theselected and its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE via remote accessROI-S06701- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Re-enter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to the PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06701- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new settingROI-S06701- 16 -28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo Refresh

Click Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06701- 17 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1 configuration)ROI-S06701- 18 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes the relevant license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this screen If you exchanging the license file click [Import] andadvance the following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06701- 19 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06701- 20 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06701- 21 -211 Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The Overall Status Window provides a snapshot ofthe most significant monitored items in the NEThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NEThis window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed hereThe following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1

bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or ManualTransmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1

bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1

bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2

bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 (OPTICAL) interface)bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODU

configuration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusWindowROI-S06701- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU(These monitored items are identical for PDH and SDH)ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredODU TypeMismatchIn NEOc ODU(CPV) connection mode this alarm isissued when the Modulation Scheme setting is notQPSK16QAMNoneTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter in the ODUit is issued when the transmission level decreases 3dB or more from the preset minimum ATPC levelNoneTX INPUT Indicates the status of the ODU input signal from theIDU it is issued when the input signal from the IDUis lostNoneRX LEVEL Indicates the status of the received RF signal levelof the ODU it is issued when the RF signal dropsbelow the RX thresholdNoneAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizer in the ODU itis issued when an anomaly occurs in the synthesizerNoneODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in the ODU it isissued when an anomaly occurs during CPUoperationNoneMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)NoneLO REF Indicates the status of the LO reference signal usedfor VH signal synchronization When the referencesignal in the ODU falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedfor XPICTCN-Rx LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for15 min alarmNoneTCN-Rx LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for

1 day alarmNoneTx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for transmitting signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standbyRx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for receiving signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathROI-S06701- 23 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulator-demodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomaly occurs in themodulator-demodulatorNoneMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properly mounted Ifthe MODEM contact is unplugged or if none ismounted (in accordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNoneMODEM TypeMismatchIndicates that CTRL FW Version (4xx) andMODEM Parameter Version (50 or higher) are notcompatible This alarm is also issued when noCompact MODEM is setNoneLOF Indicates the frame synchronization status If thesynchronization with DMR is lost this alarm isissuedNoneFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers of an NE and itsopposite are out of syncNoneHigh BER Indicates severe quality deterioration status If thesignal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthis alarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable threshold levels are 1E-31E-4 and 1E-5NoneROI-S06701- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLow BER Indicates low to moderate quality deterioration statusbetween radio sections When the signaldeteriorates below the present threshold value thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The selectable threshold values are 1E-6

1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status If the signaldeteriorates beyond the present threshold level thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The present threshold is a BER of 1E-9NoneMOD Indicates the operating status of the MOD If anyanomaly occurs in the modulator this alarm isissuedNoneDEM Indicates the operating status of the DEM If anyanomaly occurs in the demodulator this alarm isissuedNoneInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of the input powervoltage When there is an anomaly in the inputvoltage this alarm is issuedNonePower Supply Indicates the operating status of the power supplyWhen there is an anomaly in the power supply thisalarm is issuedNoneIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable between IDU andODU If a short circuit is caused between ODU andthe IDU this alarm is issuedNoneCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cable equalizer Thisalarm is issued when the equalizer function does notkick inNoneXIF Indicates the status of the XIF input signal of theMain Master IDU and Sub Master IDU When theXIF input signal falls below the threshold this alarmis issued and the XPIC function is resetfor XPICXPIC Status Indicates the status of XPIC operation When theXPIC function is reset ldquoResetrdquo is indicated and theldquoResetrdquo LED on the front panel is litfor XPICXREF Indicates the status of the CLK reference signalused for VH signal synchronization When there isan anomaly in the reference OSC in the MODEMhis alarm is issuedfor XPICLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizer functionOPR When the linearizer function is usedNO OPR When the linearizer function is not usedIn this case TX output power decreasesapprox 4 dBm from a standard valueNA When the ODU is used without linearizerfunctionNot available in QPSKModulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOcODU(CPV) connection modeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating status this alarm isissued when the linearizer is not properly operatingin the OPR stateNot available in QPSKmodulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOc

ODU(CPV) connection modeFading Status Indicates anomalies in signal strength this alarm isissued when signal is too weakNoneATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of the ATPC If theATPC is not properly functioning stop the controland maintain the TX output level at HOLD MIN(selectable)Only when ATPC is usedROI-S06701- 25 -214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interfacePDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the Main InterfaceIf any anomaly occurs in the INTFC (1) Module thisalarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (1)does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneInput LOS CH (1 ndash 48) Indicates the input status of the input E1 signal fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedOnly when CH USAGE is setas usedAIS received CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedAIS Received Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as usedDepending on whether theAIS Received Condition(Provisioning) is set toStatus or AlarmAIS generated CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedAIS Generated Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as used

ROI-S06701- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUsage Error CH(1 - 48)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interface WhenE1 signal is applied to the input interface as long asit is set to Not Used this alarm is generated Thisparameter is indicated only when CH Usage ErrorReport has been selectedCH Usage Error Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as not usedINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B) 1Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (in anychannel)NoneLAN Link Port (1-4) Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedLAN Collision Port(1-4)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-4)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-4)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at used1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYSDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC(1) does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the MAIN INTFC If

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

Category ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminSYSTEM ALARM BUZZER - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONNECT (Remote Login) - - - 1048774 1048774EQUIPMENT (Wizard Setting) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETUP NE NAME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774NOTE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PROVISIONING CHANNEL SETTING CH USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE ERROR REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS GENERATED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E1 PORT IMPEDANCE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DXC CH Setting DXC Function - - 1048774 1048774 1048774BER THRESHOLD HIGH BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SETTING LOW BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (DMR) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SD (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC ASSIGNMENT RS-232C-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC LAN2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN PORT SETTING PORTx USAGE(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) PORTx USAGE 1048774 1048774 1048774SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) SPEED amp DUPLEX PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774FLOW CONTROL PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) FLOW CONTROL PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COLLISION REPORT PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) COLLISION REPORT PORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LINK LOSS FORWARDING PORTx(Note depending on the equipmentconfiguration this may be separatelydisplayed as MAIN and SUB - - 1048774 1048774 1048774INTFC (2) LINK LOSS FORWARDINGPORTx - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLOCK SOURCE SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 10487742M FRAMING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SUB SWITCHING FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MEDIA TYPE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE SPEED amp DUPLEX - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE LINK LOSS FORWARDING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774GbE FLOW CONTROL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS ALS FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS INTERVAL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX POWER CTRL MTPC TX POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC THRESHOLD LEVEL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ADDITIONAL ATT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MAX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MIN) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

ROI-S06701- 11 -1048774 Available Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible FunctionsCategory ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminATPC POWER MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774COMM ALARM MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION TX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774for TXRX SW RX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

RX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW CONDITION-XPIC RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION for APS APS MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SF - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SIGNAL DEGRADE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN COUNT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN DETECT TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN HOLD TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONDITIONLOCALFAIL XPIC CONDITION-LOCAL FAIL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF CONTROL TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN DEVICE RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTERx ALARM - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON PMON Threshold - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CTRL CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items that do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06701- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06701- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network

1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar of PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both theselected and its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE via remote accessROI-S06701- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Re-enter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to the PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06701- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new settingROI-S06701- 16 -28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo Refresh

Click Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06701- 17 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1 configuration)ROI-S06701- 18 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes the relevant license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this screen If you exchanging the license file click [Import] andadvance the following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06701- 19 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06701- 20 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06701- 21 -211 Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The Overall Status Window provides a snapshot ofthe most significant monitored items in the NEThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NEThis window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed hereThe following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1

bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or ManualTransmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1

bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1

bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2

bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 (OPTICAL) interface)bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODU

configuration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusWindowROI-S06701- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU(These monitored items are identical for PDH and SDH)ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredODU TypeMismatchIn NEOc ODU(CPV) connection mode this alarm isissued when the Modulation Scheme setting is notQPSK16QAMNoneTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter in the ODUit is issued when the transmission level decreases 3dB or more from the preset minimum ATPC levelNoneTX INPUT Indicates the status of the ODU input signal from theIDU it is issued when the input signal from the IDUis lostNoneRX LEVEL Indicates the status of the received RF signal levelof the ODU it is issued when the RF signal dropsbelow the RX thresholdNoneAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizer in the ODU itis issued when an anomaly occurs in the synthesizerNoneODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in the ODU it isissued when an anomaly occurs during CPUoperationNoneMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)NoneLO REF Indicates the status of the LO reference signal usedfor VH signal synchronization When the referencesignal in the ODU falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedfor XPICTCN-Rx LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for15 min alarmNoneTCN-Rx LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for

1 day alarmNoneTx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for transmitting signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standbyRx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for receiving signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathROI-S06701- 23 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulator-demodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomaly occurs in themodulator-demodulatorNoneMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properly mounted Ifthe MODEM contact is unplugged or if none ismounted (in accordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNoneMODEM TypeMismatchIndicates that CTRL FW Version (4xx) andMODEM Parameter Version (50 or higher) are notcompatible This alarm is also issued when noCompact MODEM is setNoneLOF Indicates the frame synchronization status If thesynchronization with DMR is lost this alarm isissuedNoneFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers of an NE and itsopposite are out of syncNoneHigh BER Indicates severe quality deterioration status If thesignal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthis alarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable threshold levels are 1E-31E-4 and 1E-5NoneROI-S06701- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLow BER Indicates low to moderate quality deterioration statusbetween radio sections When the signaldeteriorates below the present threshold value thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The selectable threshold values are 1E-6

1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status If the signaldeteriorates beyond the present threshold level thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The present threshold is a BER of 1E-9NoneMOD Indicates the operating status of the MOD If anyanomaly occurs in the modulator this alarm isissuedNoneDEM Indicates the operating status of the DEM If anyanomaly occurs in the demodulator this alarm isissuedNoneInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of the input powervoltage When there is an anomaly in the inputvoltage this alarm is issuedNonePower Supply Indicates the operating status of the power supplyWhen there is an anomaly in the power supply thisalarm is issuedNoneIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable between IDU andODU If a short circuit is caused between ODU andthe IDU this alarm is issuedNoneCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cable equalizer Thisalarm is issued when the equalizer function does notkick inNoneXIF Indicates the status of the XIF input signal of theMain Master IDU and Sub Master IDU When theXIF input signal falls below the threshold this alarmis issued and the XPIC function is resetfor XPICXPIC Status Indicates the status of XPIC operation When theXPIC function is reset ldquoResetrdquo is indicated and theldquoResetrdquo LED on the front panel is litfor XPICXREF Indicates the status of the CLK reference signalused for VH signal synchronization When there isan anomaly in the reference OSC in the MODEMhis alarm is issuedfor XPICLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizer functionOPR When the linearizer function is usedNO OPR When the linearizer function is not usedIn this case TX output power decreasesapprox 4 dBm from a standard valueNA When the ODU is used without linearizerfunctionNot available in QPSKModulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOcODU(CPV) connection modeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating status this alarm isissued when the linearizer is not properly operatingin the OPR stateNot available in QPSKmodulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOc

ODU(CPV) connection modeFading Status Indicates anomalies in signal strength this alarm isissued when signal is too weakNoneATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of the ATPC If theATPC is not properly functioning stop the controland maintain the TX output level at HOLD MIN(selectable)Only when ATPC is usedROI-S06701- 25 -214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interfacePDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the Main InterfaceIf any anomaly occurs in the INTFC (1) Module thisalarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (1)does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneInput LOS CH (1 ndash 48) Indicates the input status of the input E1 signal fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedOnly when CH USAGE is setas usedAIS received CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedAIS Received Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as usedDepending on whether theAIS Received Condition(Provisioning) is set toStatus or AlarmAIS generated CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedAIS Generated Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as used

ROI-S06701- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUsage Error CH(1 - 48)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interface WhenE1 signal is applied to the input interface as long asit is set to Not Used this alarm is generated Thisparameter is indicated only when CH Usage ErrorReport has been selectedCH Usage Error Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as not usedINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B) 1Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (in anychannel)NoneLAN Link Port (1-4) Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedLAN Collision Port(1-4)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-4)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-4)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at used1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYSDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC(1) does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the MAIN INTFC If

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW CONDITION-XPIC RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITION for APS APS MANUAL MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SF - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS CONDITION-SIGNAL DEGRADE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN COUNT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN DETECT TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOCK IN HOLD TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONDITIONLOCALFAIL XPIC CONDITION-LOCAL FAIL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF CONTROL TIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774APS MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LAN DEVICE RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774XPIC CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTERx ALARM - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON PMON Threshold - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CTRL CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DOWNLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOAD CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items that do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06701- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06701- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (NE Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network

1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar of PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both theselected and its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE via remote accessROI-S06701- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Re-enter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to the PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06701- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new settingROI-S06701- 16 -28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo Refresh

Click Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06701- 17 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1 configuration)ROI-S06701- 18 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes the relevant license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this screen If you exchanging the license file click [Import] andadvance the following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06701- 19 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06701- 20 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06701- 21 -211 Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The Overall Status Window provides a snapshot ofthe most significant monitored items in the NEThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NEThis window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed hereThe following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1

bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or ManualTransmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1

bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1

bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2

bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 (OPTICAL) interface)bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODU

configuration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusWindowROI-S06701- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU(These monitored items are identical for PDH and SDH)ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredODU TypeMismatchIn NEOc ODU(CPV) connection mode this alarm isissued when the Modulation Scheme setting is notQPSK16QAMNoneTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter in the ODUit is issued when the transmission level decreases 3dB or more from the preset minimum ATPC levelNoneTX INPUT Indicates the status of the ODU input signal from theIDU it is issued when the input signal from the IDUis lostNoneRX LEVEL Indicates the status of the received RF signal levelof the ODU it is issued when the RF signal dropsbelow the RX thresholdNoneAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizer in the ODU itis issued when an anomaly occurs in the synthesizerNoneODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in the ODU it isissued when an anomaly occurs during CPUoperationNoneMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)NoneLO REF Indicates the status of the LO reference signal usedfor VH signal synchronization When the referencesignal in the ODU falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedfor XPICTCN-Rx LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for15 min alarmNoneTCN-Rx LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for

1 day alarmNoneTx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for transmitting signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standbyRx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for receiving signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathROI-S06701- 23 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulator-demodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomaly occurs in themodulator-demodulatorNoneMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properly mounted Ifthe MODEM contact is unplugged or if none ismounted (in accordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNoneMODEM TypeMismatchIndicates that CTRL FW Version (4xx) andMODEM Parameter Version (50 or higher) are notcompatible This alarm is also issued when noCompact MODEM is setNoneLOF Indicates the frame synchronization status If thesynchronization with DMR is lost this alarm isissuedNoneFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers of an NE and itsopposite are out of syncNoneHigh BER Indicates severe quality deterioration status If thesignal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthis alarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable threshold levels are 1E-31E-4 and 1E-5NoneROI-S06701- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLow BER Indicates low to moderate quality deterioration statusbetween radio sections When the signaldeteriorates below the present threshold value thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The selectable threshold values are 1E-6

1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status If the signaldeteriorates beyond the present threshold level thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The present threshold is a BER of 1E-9NoneMOD Indicates the operating status of the MOD If anyanomaly occurs in the modulator this alarm isissuedNoneDEM Indicates the operating status of the DEM If anyanomaly occurs in the demodulator this alarm isissuedNoneInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of the input powervoltage When there is an anomaly in the inputvoltage this alarm is issuedNonePower Supply Indicates the operating status of the power supplyWhen there is an anomaly in the power supply thisalarm is issuedNoneIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable between IDU andODU If a short circuit is caused between ODU andthe IDU this alarm is issuedNoneCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cable equalizer Thisalarm is issued when the equalizer function does notkick inNoneXIF Indicates the status of the XIF input signal of theMain Master IDU and Sub Master IDU When theXIF input signal falls below the threshold this alarmis issued and the XPIC function is resetfor XPICXPIC Status Indicates the status of XPIC operation When theXPIC function is reset ldquoResetrdquo is indicated and theldquoResetrdquo LED on the front panel is litfor XPICXREF Indicates the status of the CLK reference signalused for VH signal synchronization When there isan anomaly in the reference OSC in the MODEMhis alarm is issuedfor XPICLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizer functionOPR When the linearizer function is usedNO OPR When the linearizer function is not usedIn this case TX output power decreasesapprox 4 dBm from a standard valueNA When the ODU is used without linearizerfunctionNot available in QPSKModulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOcODU(CPV) connection modeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating status this alarm isissued when the linearizer is not properly operatingin the OPR stateNot available in QPSKmodulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOc

ODU(CPV) connection modeFading Status Indicates anomalies in signal strength this alarm isissued when signal is too weakNoneATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of the ATPC If theATPC is not properly functioning stop the controland maintain the TX output level at HOLD MIN(selectable)Only when ATPC is usedROI-S06701- 25 -214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interfacePDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the Main InterfaceIf any anomaly occurs in the INTFC (1) Module thisalarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (1)does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneInput LOS CH (1 ndash 48) Indicates the input status of the input E1 signal fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedOnly when CH USAGE is setas usedAIS received CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedAIS Received Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as usedDepending on whether theAIS Received Condition(Provisioning) is set toStatus or AlarmAIS generated CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedAIS Generated Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as used

ROI-S06701- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUsage Error CH(1 - 48)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interface WhenE1 signal is applied to the input interface as long asit is set to Not Used this alarm is generated Thisparameter is indicated only when CH Usage ErrorReport has been selectedCH Usage Error Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as not usedINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B) 1Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (in anychannel)NoneLAN Link Port (1-4) Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedLAN Collision Port(1-4)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-4)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-4)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at used1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYSDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC(1) does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the MAIN INTFC If

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar of PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elements inthe network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window The PNMT main window for both theselected and its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local network)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE via remote accessROI-S06701- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Re-enter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to the PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06701- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis feature is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of the PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new settingROI-S06701- 16 -28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo Refresh

Click Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06701- 17 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1 configuration)ROI-S06701- 18 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes the relevant license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this screen If you exchanging the license file click [Import] andadvance the following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06701- 19 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06701- 20 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06701- 21 -211 Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The Overall Status Window provides a snapshot ofthe most significant monitored items in the NEThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NEThis window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed hereThe following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1

bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or ManualTransmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1

bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1

bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2

bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 (OPTICAL) interface)bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODU

configuration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusWindowROI-S06701- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU(These monitored items are identical for PDH and SDH)ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredODU TypeMismatchIn NEOc ODU(CPV) connection mode this alarm isissued when the Modulation Scheme setting is notQPSK16QAMNoneTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter in the ODUit is issued when the transmission level decreases 3dB or more from the preset minimum ATPC levelNoneTX INPUT Indicates the status of the ODU input signal from theIDU it is issued when the input signal from the IDUis lostNoneRX LEVEL Indicates the status of the received RF signal levelof the ODU it is issued when the RF signal dropsbelow the RX thresholdNoneAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizer in the ODU itis issued when an anomaly occurs in the synthesizerNoneODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in the ODU it isissued when an anomaly occurs during CPUoperationNoneMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)NoneLO REF Indicates the status of the LO reference signal usedfor VH signal synchronization When the referencesignal in the ODU falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedfor XPICTCN-Rx LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for15 min alarmNoneTCN-Rx LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for

1 day alarmNoneTx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for transmitting signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standbyRx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for receiving signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathROI-S06701- 23 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulator-demodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomaly occurs in themodulator-demodulatorNoneMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properly mounted Ifthe MODEM contact is unplugged or if none ismounted (in accordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNoneMODEM TypeMismatchIndicates that CTRL FW Version (4xx) andMODEM Parameter Version (50 or higher) are notcompatible This alarm is also issued when noCompact MODEM is setNoneLOF Indicates the frame synchronization status If thesynchronization with DMR is lost this alarm isissuedNoneFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers of an NE and itsopposite are out of syncNoneHigh BER Indicates severe quality deterioration status If thesignal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthis alarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable threshold levels are 1E-31E-4 and 1E-5NoneROI-S06701- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLow BER Indicates low to moderate quality deterioration statusbetween radio sections When the signaldeteriorates below the present threshold value thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The selectable threshold values are 1E-6

1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status If the signaldeteriorates beyond the present threshold level thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The present threshold is a BER of 1E-9NoneMOD Indicates the operating status of the MOD If anyanomaly occurs in the modulator this alarm isissuedNoneDEM Indicates the operating status of the DEM If anyanomaly occurs in the demodulator this alarm isissuedNoneInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of the input powervoltage When there is an anomaly in the inputvoltage this alarm is issuedNonePower Supply Indicates the operating status of the power supplyWhen there is an anomaly in the power supply thisalarm is issuedNoneIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable between IDU andODU If a short circuit is caused between ODU andthe IDU this alarm is issuedNoneCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cable equalizer Thisalarm is issued when the equalizer function does notkick inNoneXIF Indicates the status of the XIF input signal of theMain Master IDU and Sub Master IDU When theXIF input signal falls below the threshold this alarmis issued and the XPIC function is resetfor XPICXPIC Status Indicates the status of XPIC operation When theXPIC function is reset ldquoResetrdquo is indicated and theldquoResetrdquo LED on the front panel is litfor XPICXREF Indicates the status of the CLK reference signalused for VH signal synchronization When there isan anomaly in the reference OSC in the MODEMhis alarm is issuedfor XPICLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizer functionOPR When the linearizer function is usedNO OPR When the linearizer function is not usedIn this case TX output power decreasesapprox 4 dBm from a standard valueNA When the ODU is used without linearizerfunctionNot available in QPSKModulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOcODU(CPV) connection modeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating status this alarm isissued when the linearizer is not properly operatingin the OPR stateNot available in QPSKmodulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOc

ODU(CPV) connection modeFading Status Indicates anomalies in signal strength this alarm isissued when signal is too weakNoneATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of the ATPC If theATPC is not properly functioning stop the controland maintain the TX output level at HOLD MIN(selectable)Only when ATPC is usedROI-S06701- 25 -214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interfacePDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the Main InterfaceIf any anomaly occurs in the INTFC (1) Module thisalarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (1)does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneInput LOS CH (1 ndash 48) Indicates the input status of the input E1 signal fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedOnly when CH USAGE is setas usedAIS received CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedAIS Received Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as usedDepending on whether theAIS Received Condition(Provisioning) is set toStatus or AlarmAIS generated CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedAIS Generated Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as used

ROI-S06701- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUsage Error CH(1 - 48)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interface WhenE1 signal is applied to the input interface as long asit is set to Not Used this alarm is generated Thisparameter is indicated only when CH Usage ErrorReport has been selectedCH Usage Error Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as not usedINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B) 1Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (in anychannel)NoneLAN Link Port (1-4) Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedLAN Collision Port(1-4)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-4)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-4)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at used1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYSDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC(1) does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the MAIN INTFC If

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

Click Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06701- 17 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to the target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This feature allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1 configuration)ROI-S06701- 18 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes the relevant license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this screen If you exchanging the license file click [Import] andadvance the following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06701- 19 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06701- 20 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06701- 21 -211 Overall Status Window (PDH and SDH)This window is displayed during startup The Overall Status Window provides a snapshot ofthe most significant monitored items in the NEThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for the NEThis window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed hereThe following items are displayed in this windowbull TX RF Frequency ndash the currently used transmission frequency 1bull RX RF Frequency ndash the currently used receiving frequency 1

bull TX Power Control ndash shows the power control mode currently used by the ODU TheTX Power Control is either Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) or ManualTransmitter Power Control (MTPC)bull MTPC TX Power ndash the value (in dB) of the Manual Transmitter Power Controlattenuation currently set in the ODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have valid dataif the MTPC is enabled 1

bull Frame ID ndash the predefined value of the NE frame ID 1

bull XPIC Usage ndash the status of usage for the XPICbull Main (work) ndash the main work interface settingbull SUB (PROT) ndash the SUB (PROTECTION) Interface setting2

bull Transmission Capacity (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the transmission capacity of the systembull Modulation scheme (DIR-ADIR-B) 3 ndash the currently used modulation typebull ALS Function ndash Intermittently turns laser output onoff after designated interval fromstart of LOS mode being Enabled or Disabled (Only STM-1 (OPTICAL) interface)bull APS Online Status ndash indicates route when APS is availablebull TX SW status (for hot standby configuration only) ndash shows which modem-ODU

configuration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusWindowROI-S06701- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU(These monitored items are identical for PDH and SDH)ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredODU TypeMismatchIn NEOc ODU(CPV) connection mode this alarm isissued when the Modulation Scheme setting is notQPSK16QAMNoneTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter in the ODUit is issued when the transmission level decreases 3dB or more from the preset minimum ATPC levelNoneTX INPUT Indicates the status of the ODU input signal from theIDU it is issued when the input signal from the IDUis lostNoneRX LEVEL Indicates the status of the received RF signal levelof the ODU it is issued when the RF signal dropsbelow the RX thresholdNoneAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizer in the ODU itis issued when an anomaly occurs in the synthesizerNoneODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in the ODU it isissued when an anomaly occurs during CPUoperationNoneMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)NoneLO REF Indicates the status of the LO reference signal usedfor VH signal synchronization When the referencesignal in the ODU falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedfor XPICTCN-Rx LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for15 min alarmNoneTCN-Rx LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for

1 day alarmNoneTx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for transmitting signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standbyRx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for receiving signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathROI-S06701- 23 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulator-demodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomaly occurs in themodulator-demodulatorNoneMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properly mounted Ifthe MODEM contact is unplugged or if none ismounted (in accordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNoneMODEM TypeMismatchIndicates that CTRL FW Version (4xx) andMODEM Parameter Version (50 or higher) are notcompatible This alarm is also issued when noCompact MODEM is setNoneLOF Indicates the frame synchronization status If thesynchronization with DMR is lost this alarm isissuedNoneFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers of an NE and itsopposite are out of syncNoneHigh BER Indicates severe quality deterioration status If thesignal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthis alarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable threshold levels are 1E-31E-4 and 1E-5NoneROI-S06701- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLow BER Indicates low to moderate quality deterioration statusbetween radio sections When the signaldeteriorates below the present threshold value thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The selectable threshold values are 1E-6

1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status If the signaldeteriorates beyond the present threshold level thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The present threshold is a BER of 1E-9NoneMOD Indicates the operating status of the MOD If anyanomaly occurs in the modulator this alarm isissuedNoneDEM Indicates the operating status of the DEM If anyanomaly occurs in the demodulator this alarm isissuedNoneInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of the input powervoltage When there is an anomaly in the inputvoltage this alarm is issuedNonePower Supply Indicates the operating status of the power supplyWhen there is an anomaly in the power supply thisalarm is issuedNoneIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable between IDU andODU If a short circuit is caused between ODU andthe IDU this alarm is issuedNoneCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cable equalizer Thisalarm is issued when the equalizer function does notkick inNoneXIF Indicates the status of the XIF input signal of theMain Master IDU and Sub Master IDU When theXIF input signal falls below the threshold this alarmis issued and the XPIC function is resetfor XPICXPIC Status Indicates the status of XPIC operation When theXPIC function is reset ldquoResetrdquo is indicated and theldquoResetrdquo LED on the front panel is litfor XPICXREF Indicates the status of the CLK reference signalused for VH signal synchronization When there isan anomaly in the reference OSC in the MODEMhis alarm is issuedfor XPICLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizer functionOPR When the linearizer function is usedNO OPR When the linearizer function is not usedIn this case TX output power decreasesapprox 4 dBm from a standard valueNA When the ODU is used without linearizerfunctionNot available in QPSKModulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOcODU(CPV) connection modeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating status this alarm isissued when the linearizer is not properly operatingin the OPR stateNot available in QPSKmodulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOc

ODU(CPV) connection modeFading Status Indicates anomalies in signal strength this alarm isissued when signal is too weakNoneATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of the ATPC If theATPC is not properly functioning stop the controland maintain the TX output level at HOLD MIN(selectable)Only when ATPC is usedROI-S06701- 25 -214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interfacePDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the Main InterfaceIf any anomaly occurs in the INTFC (1) Module thisalarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (1)does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneInput LOS CH (1 ndash 48) Indicates the input status of the input E1 signal fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedOnly when CH USAGE is setas usedAIS received CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedAIS Received Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as usedDepending on whether theAIS Received Condition(Provisioning) is set toStatus or AlarmAIS generated CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedAIS Generated Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as used

ROI-S06701- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUsage Error CH(1 - 48)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interface WhenE1 signal is applied to the input interface as long asit is set to Not Used this alarm is generated Thisparameter is indicated only when CH Usage ErrorReport has been selectedCH Usage Error Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as not usedINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B) 1Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (in anychannel)NoneLAN Link Port (1-4) Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedLAN Collision Port(1-4)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-4)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-4)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at used1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYSDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC(1) does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the MAIN INTFC If

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

configuration is currently used for transmitting signalsbull RX SW status (for 1+1 system only) ndash shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signals1 For Twin path configuration both respective parameters (1 2) are shown2 Applies only to SDH interface3 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusWindowROI-S06701- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODU(These monitored items are identical for PDH and SDH)ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredODU TypeMismatchIn NEOc ODU(CPV) connection mode this alarm isissued when the Modulation Scheme setting is notQPSK16QAMNoneTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter in the ODUit is issued when the transmission level decreases 3dB or more from the preset minimum ATPC levelNoneTX INPUT Indicates the status of the ODU input signal from theIDU it is issued when the input signal from the IDUis lostNoneRX LEVEL Indicates the status of the received RF signal levelof the ODU it is issued when the RF signal dropsbelow the RX thresholdNoneAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizer in the ODU itis issued when an anomaly occurs in the synthesizerNoneODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in the ODU it isissued when an anomaly occurs during CPUoperationNoneMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)NoneLO REF Indicates the status of the LO reference signal usedfor VH signal synchronization When the referencesignal in the ODU falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedfor XPICTCN-Rx LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for15 min alarmNoneTCN-Rx LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold Crossing Notice level for

1 day alarmNoneTx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for transmitting signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standbyRx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for receiving signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathROI-S06701- 23 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulator-demodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomaly occurs in themodulator-demodulatorNoneMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properly mounted Ifthe MODEM contact is unplugged or if none ismounted (in accordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNoneMODEM TypeMismatchIndicates that CTRL FW Version (4xx) andMODEM Parameter Version (50 or higher) are notcompatible This alarm is also issued when noCompact MODEM is setNoneLOF Indicates the frame synchronization status If thesynchronization with DMR is lost this alarm isissuedNoneFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers of an NE and itsopposite are out of syncNoneHigh BER Indicates severe quality deterioration status If thesignal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthis alarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable threshold levels are 1E-31E-4 and 1E-5NoneROI-S06701- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLow BER Indicates low to moderate quality deterioration statusbetween radio sections When the signaldeteriorates below the present threshold value thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The selectable threshold values are 1E-6

1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status If the signaldeteriorates beyond the present threshold level thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The present threshold is a BER of 1E-9NoneMOD Indicates the operating status of the MOD If anyanomaly occurs in the modulator this alarm isissuedNoneDEM Indicates the operating status of the DEM If anyanomaly occurs in the demodulator this alarm isissuedNoneInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of the input powervoltage When there is an anomaly in the inputvoltage this alarm is issuedNonePower Supply Indicates the operating status of the power supplyWhen there is an anomaly in the power supply thisalarm is issuedNoneIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable between IDU andODU If a short circuit is caused between ODU andthe IDU this alarm is issuedNoneCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cable equalizer Thisalarm is issued when the equalizer function does notkick inNoneXIF Indicates the status of the XIF input signal of theMain Master IDU and Sub Master IDU When theXIF input signal falls below the threshold this alarmis issued and the XPIC function is resetfor XPICXPIC Status Indicates the status of XPIC operation When theXPIC function is reset ldquoResetrdquo is indicated and theldquoResetrdquo LED on the front panel is litfor XPICXREF Indicates the status of the CLK reference signalused for VH signal synchronization When there isan anomaly in the reference OSC in the MODEMhis alarm is issuedfor XPICLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizer functionOPR When the linearizer function is usedNO OPR When the linearizer function is not usedIn this case TX output power decreasesapprox 4 dBm from a standard valueNA When the ODU is used without linearizerfunctionNot available in QPSKModulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOcODU(CPV) connection modeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating status this alarm isissued when the linearizer is not properly operatingin the OPR stateNot available in QPSKmodulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOc

ODU(CPV) connection modeFading Status Indicates anomalies in signal strength this alarm isissued when signal is too weakNoneATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of the ATPC If theATPC is not properly functioning stop the controland maintain the TX output level at HOLD MIN(selectable)Only when ATPC is usedROI-S06701- 25 -214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interfacePDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the Main InterfaceIf any anomaly occurs in the INTFC (1) Module thisalarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (1)does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneInput LOS CH (1 ndash 48) Indicates the input status of the input E1 signal fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedOnly when CH USAGE is setas usedAIS received CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedAIS Received Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as usedDepending on whether theAIS Received Condition(Provisioning) is set toStatus or AlarmAIS generated CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedAIS Generated Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as used

ROI-S06701- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUsage Error CH(1 - 48)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interface WhenE1 signal is applied to the input interface as long asit is set to Not Used this alarm is generated Thisparameter is indicated only when CH Usage ErrorReport has been selectedCH Usage Error Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as not usedINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B) 1Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (in anychannel)NoneLAN Link Port (1-4) Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedLAN Collision Port(1-4)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-4)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-4)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at used1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYSDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC(1) does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the MAIN INTFC If

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

1 day alarmNoneTx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for transmitting signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standbyRx SW Status Indicates the modem-ODU configuration currentlyused for receiving signalsOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathROI-S06701- 23 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the sections on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect the MODEM tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulator-demodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomaly occurs in themodulator-demodulatorNoneMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properly mounted Ifthe MODEM contact is unplugged or if none ismounted (in accordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNoneMODEM TypeMismatchIndicates that CTRL FW Version (4xx) andMODEM Parameter Version (50 or higher) are notcompatible This alarm is also issued when noCompact MODEM is setNoneLOF Indicates the frame synchronization status If thesynchronization with DMR is lost this alarm isissuedNoneFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers of an NE and itsopposite are out of syncNoneHigh BER Indicates severe quality deterioration status If thesignal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthis alarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable threshold levels are 1E-31E-4 and 1E-5NoneROI-S06701- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLow BER Indicates low to moderate quality deterioration statusbetween radio sections When the signaldeteriorates below the present threshold value thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The selectable threshold values are 1E-6

1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status If the signaldeteriorates beyond the present threshold level thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The present threshold is a BER of 1E-9NoneMOD Indicates the operating status of the MOD If anyanomaly occurs in the modulator this alarm isissuedNoneDEM Indicates the operating status of the DEM If anyanomaly occurs in the demodulator this alarm isissuedNoneInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of the input powervoltage When there is an anomaly in the inputvoltage this alarm is issuedNonePower Supply Indicates the operating status of the power supplyWhen there is an anomaly in the power supply thisalarm is issuedNoneIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable between IDU andODU If a short circuit is caused between ODU andthe IDU this alarm is issuedNoneCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cable equalizer Thisalarm is issued when the equalizer function does notkick inNoneXIF Indicates the status of the XIF input signal of theMain Master IDU and Sub Master IDU When theXIF input signal falls below the threshold this alarmis issued and the XPIC function is resetfor XPICXPIC Status Indicates the status of XPIC operation When theXPIC function is reset ldquoResetrdquo is indicated and theldquoResetrdquo LED on the front panel is litfor XPICXREF Indicates the status of the CLK reference signalused for VH signal synchronization When there isan anomaly in the reference OSC in the MODEMhis alarm is issuedfor XPICLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizer functionOPR When the linearizer function is usedNO OPR When the linearizer function is not usedIn this case TX output power decreasesapprox 4 dBm from a standard valueNA When the ODU is used without linearizerfunctionNot available in QPSKModulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOcODU(CPV) connection modeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating status this alarm isissued when the linearizer is not properly operatingin the OPR stateNot available in QPSKmodulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOc

ODU(CPV) connection modeFading Status Indicates anomalies in signal strength this alarm isissued when signal is too weakNoneATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of the ATPC If theATPC is not properly functioning stop the controland maintain the TX output level at HOLD MIN(selectable)Only when ATPC is usedROI-S06701- 25 -214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interfacePDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the Main InterfaceIf any anomaly occurs in the INTFC (1) Module thisalarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (1)does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneInput LOS CH (1 ndash 48) Indicates the input status of the input E1 signal fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedOnly when CH USAGE is setas usedAIS received CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedAIS Received Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as usedDepending on whether theAIS Received Condition(Provisioning) is set toStatus or AlarmAIS generated CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedAIS Generated Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as used

ROI-S06701- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUsage Error CH(1 - 48)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interface WhenE1 signal is applied to the input interface as long asit is set to Not Used this alarm is generated Thisparameter is indicated only when CH Usage ErrorReport has been selectedCH Usage Error Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as not usedINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B) 1Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (in anychannel)NoneLAN Link Port (1-4) Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedLAN Collision Port(1-4)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-4)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-4)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at used1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYSDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC(1) does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the MAIN INTFC If

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status If the signaldeteriorates beyond the present threshold level thisalarm is issued and the RX-Hitless Switch isactivated The present threshold is a BER of 1E-9NoneMOD Indicates the operating status of the MOD If anyanomaly occurs in the modulator this alarm isissuedNoneDEM Indicates the operating status of the DEM If anyanomaly occurs in the demodulator this alarm isissuedNoneInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of the input powervoltage When there is an anomaly in the inputvoltage this alarm is issuedNonePower Supply Indicates the operating status of the power supplyWhen there is an anomaly in the power supply thisalarm is issuedNoneIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable between IDU andODU If a short circuit is caused between ODU andthe IDU this alarm is issuedNoneCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cable equalizer Thisalarm is issued when the equalizer function does notkick inNoneXIF Indicates the status of the XIF input signal of theMain Master IDU and Sub Master IDU When theXIF input signal falls below the threshold this alarmis issued and the XPIC function is resetfor XPICXPIC Status Indicates the status of XPIC operation When theXPIC function is reset ldquoResetrdquo is indicated and theldquoResetrdquo LED on the front panel is litfor XPICXREF Indicates the status of the CLK reference signalused for VH signal synchronization When there isan anomaly in the reference OSC in the MODEMhis alarm is issuedfor XPICLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizer functionOPR When the linearizer function is usedNO OPR When the linearizer function is not usedIn this case TX output power decreasesapprox 4 dBm from a standard valueNA When the ODU is used without linearizerfunctionNot available in QPSKModulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOcODU(CPV) connection modeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating status this alarm isissued when the linearizer is not properly operatingin the OPR stateNot available in QPSKmodulation SchemeNot displayed in NEOc

ODU(CPV) connection modeFading Status Indicates anomalies in signal strength this alarm isissued when signal is too weakNoneATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of the ATPC If theATPC is not properly functioning stop the controland maintain the TX output level at HOLD MIN(selectable)Only when ATPC is usedROI-S06701- 25 -214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interfacePDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the Main InterfaceIf any anomaly occurs in the INTFC (1) Module thisalarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (1)does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneInput LOS CH (1 ndash 48) Indicates the input status of the input E1 signal fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedOnly when CH USAGE is setas usedAIS received CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedAIS Received Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as usedDepending on whether theAIS Received Condition(Provisioning) is set toStatus or AlarmAIS generated CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedAIS Generated Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as used

ROI-S06701- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUsage Error CH(1 - 48)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interface WhenE1 signal is applied to the input interface as long asit is set to Not Used this alarm is generated Thisparameter is indicated only when CH Usage ErrorReport has been selectedCH Usage Error Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as not usedINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B) 1Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (in anychannel)NoneLAN Link Port (1-4) Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedLAN Collision Port(1-4)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-4)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-4)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at used1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYSDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC(1) does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the MAIN INTFC If

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

ODU(CPV) connection modeFading Status Indicates anomalies in signal strength this alarm isissued when signal is too weakNoneATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of the ATPC If theATPC is not properly functioning stop the controland maintain the TX output level at HOLD MIN(selectable)Only when ATPC is usedROI-S06701- 25 -214 MAIN (WORK) INTERFACE TabThe MAIN (WORK) tab displays the status of the monitored items for the main (work)interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions are availablehereTo set the main (work) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the main (work) interfaceSelect the MAIN (WORK) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEOverview and description of the monitored items for the main (work) interfacePDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the Main InterfaceIf any anomaly occurs in the INTFC (1) Module thisalarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (1)does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneInput LOS CH (1 ndash 48) Indicates the input status of the input E1 signal fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedOnly when CH USAGE is setas usedAIS received CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedAIS Received Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as usedDepending on whether theAIS Received Condition(Provisioning) is set toStatus or AlarmAIS generated CH(1 - 48)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedAIS Generated Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as used

ROI-S06701- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUsage Error CH(1 - 48)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interface WhenE1 signal is applied to the input interface as long asit is set to Not Used this alarm is generated Thisparameter is indicated only when CH Usage ErrorReport has been selectedCH Usage Error Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as not usedINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B) 1Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (in anychannel)NoneLAN Link Port (1-4) Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedLAN Collision Port(1-4)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-4)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-4)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at used1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYSDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC(1) does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the MAIN INTFC If

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

ROI-S06701- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUsage Error CH(1 - 48)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interface WhenE1 signal is applied to the input interface as long asit is set to Not Used this alarm is generated Thisparameter is indicated only when CH Usage ErrorReport has been selectedCH Usage Error Reportfunction must be enabled(set to report) and CHUSAGE is set as not usedINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1 + 1 hot standby ortwinpathUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B) 1Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (in anychannel)NoneLAN Link Port (1-4) Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedLAN Collision Port(1-4)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-4)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-4)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at used1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYSDH only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (1) Unequipped Indicates whether there is any Main Interface Ifthere is no INTFC (1) this alarm is issuedNoneINTFC (1)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC(1) does not correspond to the inventory listNoneINTFC (1) Module Indicates the operating status of the MAIN INTFC If

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

any anomaly occurs in the MAIN INTFC this alarmis issuedNoneLAN Link Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the LAN Link Port status an alarm occurswhen the link fails for the respective portsThe respective Port Usagemust be set at usedGbE LAN Link Port Indicates the GbE LAN Link Port status an alarmoccurs when the link fails for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1LAN Collision Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of any collision for therespective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port CollisionReport function must beenabled (set to report)Link Loss Forwarding Port(1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of Link Loss Forwarding statusfor the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe Link Loss Forwardingfunction must be enabledGbE Link Loss ForwardingPortIndicates the status of GbE Link Loss Forwardingstatus for the respective portsWhen GbE LINK LOSSFORWARDING=ENABLEDSpeed amp Duplex Port (1-2)(Main)Port (1-2) (SUB)Indicates the status of LAN Mode (Speed amp Duplex)for the respective portsWhen WSLAN is SUBThe respective Port Usagemust be set to usedGbE Speed amp Duplex Indicates the status of GbE LAN Mode (Speed ampDuplex) for the respective portWhen User Interface=GbEover STM-1STM-1 (1) LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input is disconnected this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedNoneROI-S06701- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredSTM-1 (1) E-BER (MUX) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepresent threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5None

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

STM-1 (1) SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presetthreshold level the alarm is issued The selectablethreshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9NoneSTM-1 (1) LOS (DMR) Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedNoneSTM-1 (1) LOF (DMR) Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal fromDMR If the input signal is out of synch this alarm isissuedNoneSTM-1 (1) E-BER (DMR) Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signalfrom the DMR unit If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issued Thesettable threshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 andIE-9NoneSTM-1 (1) SD (DMR) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 fromDMR If the signal deteriorates beyond the presetthreshold level this alarm is issued The selectableBER threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5NoneSTM-1 (1) TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalNoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) NoneSTM-1 (1) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) NoneINTFC (1) In-phase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1 andNo2 signal If the received signal delay time is outof the permissible range an Out-of-phase alarm isissuedOnly for 1+1 hot standby ortwinpathSTM-1 (1) TF (for SDH) Indicates the signal interruption status When theMS-AIS Generation is set to Disable When STM-1 output signal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedNoneSTM-1 (2) UAE (DMR) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (1) Output Control Indicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signalfrom STM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledROI-S06701- 28 -215 SUB (PROT) Interface TabThe SUB (PROT) Interface tab displays the status of the monitored items for the SUB(PROT) interface This window only displays current settings and no control functions areavailable hereTo set the SUB (PROT) interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the SUB (PROT) interfaceSelect the SUB (PROT) tab in the PNMT main window of the target NE

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

ROI-S06701- 29 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC (2) Module Indicates the operating status of the SUB INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in the SUB INTFC this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)UnequippedIndicates whether there is any SUB Interface If there isno INTFC (2) this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2)Type MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFC (2)does not correspond to the inventory listOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the input signal is out of frame synchronization thisalarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromMUX If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(MUX)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from MUXIf the signal deteriorates below the preset threshold levelthe alarm is issued The selectable threshold values are1E-6 IE-7 1E-8 and 1E-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOS(DMR)Indicates the signal status of the STM-1 from DMR If theinput is disconnected this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) LOF(DMR)Indicates the status of the input STM-1 signal from DMRIf the input signal is out of synch this alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

STM-1 (2) E-BER(DMR)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1 signal fromthe DMR unit If the signal deteriorates below the presentthreshold level this alarm is issued The settablethreshold values are 1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and IE-9Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) SD(DMR)Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1 from DMRIf the signal deteriorates beyond the preset thresholdlevel this alarm is issued The selectable BER thresholdvalues are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5Only when APS Function isavailableINTFC (2) InphaseIndicates the DADE status of the received No1 and No2signal If the received signal delay time is out of thepermissible range an Out-of-phase alarm is issuedOnly when APS Function isavailable and only for 1+1 hotstandby or twinpathSTM-1 (2) TF Indicates alarmrdquo when there is a defect in this interfacethat interrupts the STM-1 signalOnly when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2)WS Input LOSIndicates the operating status of the LANWSWhen E1 WS input signal falls below the threshold thisalarm is issuedOnly when WS is setWS AIS Received Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AIS isreceived from MUX this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS ReceivedReport function must be enabled(set to report)WS AISGeneratedIndicates the E1 signal receiving status If AIS isgenerated in the E1 INTFC this alarm is issuedWS is set and AIS GeneratedReport function must be enabled(set to report)STM-1 (2) OutputControlIndicates signal interruption status when MS-AISGeneration is set to Disable Indicates UNDEREXECUTION when there is no STM-1 output signal fromSTM-1 INTERFACEOnly when APS Function isavailable and MS-AISGeneration is disabledSTM-1 (2) UAE(DMR)Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in DMR) Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) UAE(MUX)Indicates whether UAS weremonitored (in MUX)

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

Only when APS Function isavailableSTM-1 (2) TF (forSDH)Indicates the signal interruption status When the MSAISGeneration is set to Disable When STM-1 outputsignal of STM-1 INTFC is stopped UnderExecution is indicatedOnly when APS Function isavailableROI-S06701- 30 -216 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select the AUX IO tab in the PNMT main windowAUX IO window2161 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALM1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06701- 31 -2162 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [Input-n] button in AUX IO window2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing window21621 Setting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 32 -2163 Relay Output Setting

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

To set the relay output1 Click [Output-n] button in AUX IO window2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characters canbe used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) orEvent OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition) and Event OFF fields (the outputterminal will be open) with the Control section A maximum of 32 characters can beused5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 33 -217 Control (CTRL) TabVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2171 Control ModuleSelect the CTRL tab in the PNMT main window of the target NEThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRL windowbull CTRL Module Alarmbull MMC Mount (Yes = On No = Off)bull APS SW Fail (when APS is available)bull APS Online Status (indicates route when APS is available)bull APS Lock-in Status (when APS is available and Lock-in Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo)bull XCTRL (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and the control signal betweenMaster and Sub Master IDU is lost this alarm is issued)bull XPIC Mode Mismatch (when XPIC Usage is selected as ldquoUsedrdquo and is incorrectlydefined [eg Main Master to Main Master Sub Master to Sub Master] alarm isissued)bull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06701- 34 -2172 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in the CTRL window2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2173 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when MAINT is OFFNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06701- 35 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL window2 You can select the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquooption if you want to switch to a newly downloadedControl module Program file3 Click [Execute] button to continue the Control modulereset operation2174 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailure4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 36 -5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will close

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

automatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file (s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2175Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 37 -2175 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLwindow2 Select the module select button of CTRL If youtick the ldquowith Self Resetrdquo the Control module willbe reset automatically after program file downloadis completed In this case steps 5 thru 8 are notnecessary3 Enter the appropriate location of the program file(out) in the File field Otherwise click [Browse]to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control module Incorrectprogram files are likely to cause malfunction4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutesdepending on the program file size

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

6 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file7 Check the with ROM (Program) Switching box8 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lostfor a few minutes but will be automaticallyrestored shortlyROI-S06701- 38 -2176 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate thefile on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipmentconfiguration file is downloaded tothe correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operation6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 39 -2177 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when MAINT is OFFTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct SoftwareKey file is downloaded to thecorrect Control module Incorrect

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

Software Key file is liable to causeControl module or networkmalfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button tostart the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipmentCurrent Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button toactivate the new Software Keyfile ldquoUpdate Software Key Filerdquowindow is displayed6 Select the File to update and clickthe [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06701- 40 -2178 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL window2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directory2179 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL window2 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved 3 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation4 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button5 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directoryROI-S06701- 41 -21710 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL window2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06701- 42 -

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

21711 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate Auto Discovery and Network function respectively to PNMS and PNMT itis necessary to first connect PNMT to all equipment to configure Network dataThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCFor details refer to Appendix AROI-S06701- 43 -2-WAY settingFor details refer to Appendix BNOTESince the following IP addresses are reserved for NECrsquosRadio Equipment they cannot be set in this windowrsquos IPaddress columnReserved IP addresses Item17217251XXX Unnumbered PPP IP Address17217252XXX Unnumbered AsyncLAN IP Address17217254253 PNMT IP Address17217254254 PNMT IP AddressROI-S06701- 44 -218 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available when MAINT isOFF ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Common to PDH SDHMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ONTX SW Manual Control To control the TX switch manually (Only during hot-standby)RX SW Manual Control To control the RX switch manually (Only for 1 + 1 systems)ATPC Manual Control Allows optional transmitting power when ATPC is in operationTX Mute Control1 To set TX Mute ControlCW Control1 To turn on the Carrier Wave for measurementsIF Loopback1 To pinpoint faulty sections causing signal interruptionDADE Adjust Select the DADE for Hot-Standby Twinpath configuration tobring INTFC status back in phaseLAN Device Reset Resets LAN INTFC ports (when LAN Port setting is ldquousedrdquo)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizer function It is not displayedwhen Modulation Scheme is QPSK Not displayed if No2 is1+0 (NON PROTECTION) nor in NEOc ODU(CPV) connectionmodeRF Setting1 To change the ODU sub band for the wireless link accordingto the RF frequency allocationAntenna Alignment Mode1 To turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)XPIC Control To temporarily interrupt XPIC (when XPIC is available)1 - Only possible for NE directly connected to PNMTOnly for PDHMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-48) Allows the pinpointing of faulty sections causingsignal interruptionMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)1 Same as above(CH01-48)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAY

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

Only for SDHAPS Manual Control Allows APS to be manually controlled (when APS isavailable)Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1) Allows the pinpointing of signal interruption faultsMain Loopback-1 INTFC (2) Same as above (when APS is available)Main Loopback-2 Same as aboveALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration of laser emittanceduring ALS manual restarts (for testing)ROI-S06701- 45 -2181 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu barThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownbelow2182 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 46 -2183 TX SW Manual Control (for Hot Stand-by system only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 RX SW Manual Control for 1+1 system only)To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the RXselected system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2185 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select whether to manually turn ON (or OFF)ATPC manual power and the desired decibelvalue3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finished

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

CAUTIONWhen TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06701- 47 -2186 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is ONThis should be OFF in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select ONOFF depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TXRelease Time in the TX Mute Release Time list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2187 CW ControlWhen conducting frequency measurements the CW should be turned ON to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operation this status should be OFFTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2188 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping backthe MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF LoopBack] button in theMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 48 -2189 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state ldquoDADE ldquoOffsetDADErdquo or ldquoDADE offrdquo3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

4 Click the [Close] button when finished21810 LAN Device ResetTo reset Ports of LAN INTFC interface1 Click [LAN Device Reset] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the port that you want to reset3 Click the [Execute] button to reset LAN ports4 Click the [Close] button when finished21811 Linearizer ControlThe Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in the ODUThis feature is set to ldquoAutordquo by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 49 -21812 RF SettingSub Band of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenance window2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21813 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select ONOFF3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21814 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE to be looped back (to that NE) via theINTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 50 -21815 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedThe following conditions allow the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (tothat NE) from your selected NE via the INTFC- Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)- Redundancy 1+01+1- DXC Setting (2202) Cross Connect Function EnableROI-S06701- 51 -To set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 52 -21816 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 40)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button in the Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 ndash 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 53 -21817 APS Manual ControlTo control the APS manually1 Click [APS Manual Control] button in Maintenance window2 Select the route you want to manually controlWorking Auto or Protection (The default setting isAuto)3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to the manualcontrol of APS4 Click the [Close] button when finished21818 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (1)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFC of the selected NE ndash where you arecurrently connectedTo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-1] button inthe Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21819 Main Loopback-1 INTFC (2)This type of loopback is created at the 150MB INTFCOPT INTFC of the opposite NETo set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Signal Loopback-2] button

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

in the Maintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 54 -21820 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in the Maintenancewindow2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finished21821 XPIC ControlThis feature is used to temporarily interrupt XPICTo set XPIC Control1 Click the [XPIC Control] button in theMaintenance window2 Select [Forced Reset]3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 55 -219 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2191 Equipment Configuration windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows SDH STM-1 1+1 Hot Stand-by Configuration)To edit the NE name1 Click [NE Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new NE name in the NE Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 56 -2192 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

in the Note dialog box A maximum of 100characters can be used in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2193 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window and another EquipmentSetup window (for verifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)ROI-S06701- 57 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 58 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 59 -2 Clicking Configure opens the Setup WizardSetup Wizard3 The settings in the window can now be configured To continue click [Next]ROI-S06701- 60 -4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing windowclick [Finish]5 If LAN parameters need to be set the following window will openAfter setting the LAN parameters click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Main (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1ROI-S06701- 61 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 62 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)6 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] to activate themROI-S06701- 63 -The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersUser Interface To select the desired user interface manuallyRedundancy setting To select the desired redundancy settingMain (Work)-INTFC (1) To select the desired work interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) To select the desired protection interface (the availableoptions depend on the selected User Interface and Main(Work) interface)XPIC Usage To select the XPIC Usage (where supported)

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

APS Function APS function can only be set when both Main (WORK)and SUB (PROT) interfaces are STM-1 (optical)Inserted module This function is only enabled when the interface settingand the actually inserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match the inserted moduleModulation scheme The type of modulation is set here(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Transmission capacity This value denotes the transmission capacity (in MB) of(DIR-ADIR-B) 1 the selected interface and modulation typeTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be set within the rangedesignated by the TX Start and TX Stop frequenciesFrequency Channel Enables the TX and RX frequencies for the channels tobe set (as described below)Frame ID Identification code for the transmission framesTX Power Control The type of power control is set hereLAN Port Usage To select the LAN Port Usage (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 64 -2194 Frequency Channel1 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk2 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06701- 65 -220 ProvisioningThis window enables the main interface (MAIN INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPCparameters as well as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06701- 66 -Common itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Allows the setting of the BER value that will triggerthe alarmNoneRS-232C-1 2V-11-1 V-11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface None

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

V-11-1 V-11-2Direction SettingEnables the V-11-1 V-11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional or contradirectional)Only if SC have been assigned(without SC assignment it isinactive)MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to be set forMTPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB) thresholds to beset for ATPC operationNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuation parameters(dB)Not available if ModulationScheme = QPSKNot available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Range(Max Min)For setting the minimum and maximum ATPCtransmission power (dB)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Hold maintainingpresent status MIN minimum level)Not available when XPIC (SUBMaster) is usedCOMM Alarm Mode Select ODU output powermode when thecommunication failesbetween IDU and ODU due to some problemesWhen Mute is setthe ODUoutput power will be muted(Default)When Hold is setthe ODUoutput power will be hold(Should consider neighboringsystem)TX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)Only for 1+1 hot standbyRX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling the RXswitch and forced for overriding the disabledswitchOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (Early Warning) featureis to be included in the parametersOnly for 1+1hot standby twinpathRelay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are each associated with aparallel alarm Four can be configured and the other

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarmsNoneCluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to be enableddisabledNoneEOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling system signalpolarity to be set normal when the NEO IDU isconnected to another NEO IDU or a PASOLINKIDU invert (ed) when connected to PASOLINK+IDU or Mx IDUNoneRX Level TCNThresholdFor setting the threshold at which the TCN isdisplayedNoneXPIC Condition-Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm is issued Only when XPIC Function isldquoenabledrdquoSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNoneAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary (downstream)alarms to be turned onoffNoneROI-S06701- 67 -PDH-only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredCH Usage(CH01-CH48)For setting the respective usage of the 48 availablechannelsNoneCH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Error reportingfunctionAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Not UsedAIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal is activated byLOF High BER or both alarm parametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedAIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report At least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as Used

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS Received ConditionparametersAt least one channel (CH01-CH48) must be set as UsedE1E3 PortImpedanceFor setting the impedance of the E1E3 interfaceportThe designated channel (s)must be set as UsedDXC Function For setting the E1signal cross-connect If INTFC (MAIN) 16E1 2-WAYDXC PKG (EW LAN isselected and Redundancysetting is not 2-WAYDXC CH Setting The routedirection can be freely and individually setfor each wireless 2-WAY (DIR-ADIR-B) or tributary(TRIB) E1 signal channelIf DXC Function is set to EnableLAN Port 1-4 Usage For setting the usage of the LAN interface ports (12 3 4)Only for PDH with LANinterfaceLAN SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when LAN Port Usage isPort1-2 Shared1Port Only(Main) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) Port1-2 Shared1PortOnly (WS)LAN Speed ampDuplex Port 1-4For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN Flow ControlPort 1-4For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (1 2 3 4)When LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3 or 4)has been selected for useLAN CollisionReport Port 1-4For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when Speed amp DuplexPort 1-4 = AUTONEG or HALFDUPLEXLAN Link LossForwarding Port 1-4For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port1 (or 2 or 3or 4) has been selected for useNot available when LANSwitching Function is enabledLAN 2M Framing(DIR-ADIR-B) 1For setting the type of 2M framing of the LAN

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

interface ports (1 2 3 4)Only when LAN Port Usage=P1-2 Shared1Port Only (Main) andLAN amp 2M CAPACITY is 2Mwhile Port1 UsagePort2 Usageis set to USEDBut displayed only when 4PLAN is selected and bandwidthis set at 10M while LAN amp 2MCAPACITY is 2MSESActivation Condition(DIR-ADIR-B) 1Enables setting of the low threshold () thatactivates SESNone1 (DIR-ADIR-B) is displayed when Redundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06701- 68 -SDH STM-1 only itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for the multiplexer (MUX) NoneE-BER (DMR) Sets the E-BER threshold for the digital microwaveradio (DMR)NoneSD (DMR) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for the DMR NoneSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)NoneSUB INTFC Sets the SUB INTFC usage Only when SUB (PROT)= WS orWSLAN and P1-2 Shared1PortOnly (SC) is setWS Impedance Sets the WS impedance Only when WS is setWS AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Generated Report Only when WS is setWS AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS Received Report Only when WS is setPort1-2 (MainSUB)UsageFor setting the usage of the LAN interface ports(Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2(SUB))Except when PortUsage=INVALIDSpeed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB)For setting the speed and duplex parameters of theLAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main)Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Flow Control Port1-2(MainSUB)For setting the flow control parameters of the LANinterface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2 (Main) Port1(SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedCollision Report

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

Port1-2 (MainSUB)For setting whether collision status is reported (ornot) for the interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB))Only when Speed amp DuplexPort1-2 (MainSUB) =AUTONEG or HALF-DUPLEXLink LossForwarding Port1-2(MainSUB)For enablingdisabling the Link Loss Forwardingfunction for LAN interface ports (Port1 (Main) Port2(Main) Port1 (SUB) Port2 (SUB)Only when Port1-2 (MainSUB)Usage is set to UsedSUB SwitchingFunctionAllows the port switching function to be enabled disabledOnly when SUB (PROT)=WSLANGbE Media Type Connector type for Ethernet cable port Only when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Speed ampDuplexFor setting the GbE speed and duplex parameters ofthe LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Link LossForwardingFor enablingdisabling the GbE Link LossForwarding function for LAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1GbE Flow Control For setting the GbE flow control parameters of theLAN interface PortOnly when User Interface=GbEover STM-1ALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoff after adesignated interval from the start of LOS mode isEnabled or Disabled)Only when MAIN (WORK) =STM-1 (OPTICAL) interfaceALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start of LOS) untilAPS Function is to be executedOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS MaintenanceModeHas two settings manual for disabling APS andforced for overriding the disabled APSOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-SF For setting whether Signal Fail is to be included inthe parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledAPS Condition-Signal DegradeFor setting whether Signal Degrade is to be

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

included in the parametersOnly when ALS Function isenabledLock-in Usage Allows the Lock-in function to be enabled ordisabledOnly when ALS Function isenabledROI-S06701- 69 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredLock-in Count For setting the number (count) of oscillations(within the preset Detect[ion] Time) that willactivate the Lock-inOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Detect Time For setting the length of the time interval withinwhich the Lock-in Count is conductedOnly when Lock-in function isenabledLock-in Hold Time Sets the duration for maintaining (holding) theLock-in functionOnly when Lock-in function isenabled2201 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (for the above parameters) simply click anywhere on theProvisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivate thevarious channelsROI-S06701- 70 -2202 DXC SettingThe connecting routedirection can be freely and individually set between (DIR-ADIR-B) ortributary (TRIB) for each wireless 2-WAY E1 signal channelTo configure the DXC Settings1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Select the direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 71 -22021 Set All CHAutomatically sets all channels to be cross-connectedTo set the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [Set All Setting] button in the DXC Setting window3 Select the directions to be connected from and to4 Click the [OK] button22022 Set Multiple CHAfter setting the starting CH designate the top CH at the destination to be connected to andall CH settings will be automatically configuredTo configure the Set All CH tool1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Select the connecting direction from the starting point3 Click the [Set Multiple CH] button in the DXC Setting window4 Select the channel from which to connect at the starting point5 Select the direction and top CH to be connected to

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

6 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 72 -22023 DXC Setting CH MAPThis map displays the cross-connection status during configuringchanging of the settings- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIB- When passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted(connection lines appear as flashing lines)To configure the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Changing the DXC settings will cause the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button to bedisplayed3 Click the [DXC Setting CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window4 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 73 -22024 DXC Current CH MAPThis map displays the actual current cross-connection status- Blue line DIR-A connected to DIR-B- Green line DIR-B connected to TRIB- Purple line TRIB connected to TRIBWhen passing the cursor over a CH no the connection status is highlighted (connectionlines appear as flashing lines)To set the DXC Setting CH MAP1 Click the [DXC Setting] button in the Provisioning window2 Click the [DXC Current CH MAP] button in the DXC Setting window3 Click the [OK] buttonROI-S06701- 74 -2203 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set inthis window2204 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg LAN RS-232C V11) that is availablefor user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interface for SC3 and SC4Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 75 -2205 LAN Port SettingAllows the LAN Port settings to be input or changedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 Standard)Main (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 76 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) STM-1 (Optical)SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANMain (Work) - INTFC (1) 4Port LAN with E1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANROI-S06701- 77 -Main (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLAN2206 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2207 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold Level AdditionalATT ATPC Range as well as Power mode can be set inthis windowROI-S06701- 78 -2208 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can beset2209 SW Condition (APS)Allows the various switching (SW) parameters for APS to besetROI-S06701- 79 -22010 Relay ConfigurationThis window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms22011 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be enableddisabled in this window22012 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) when connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or MxIDUROI-S06701- 80 -22013 PMON SelectThe RX Level TCN Threshold and SES Activation percentage can be set22014 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression ofsecondary (downstream) alarms can beturned onoff22015 XPIC Condition - Local FailFor setting operation after Ref Local Alarm isissued the setting is switched from Ref LO toSelf LOClick ldquoMute to execute MuteROI-S06701- 81 -221 Link Performance MonitorThe following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks (OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has been exceededThe threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed daily performance datafor the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2211 Viewing Summary Link Performance MonitorTo view Summary Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT window1048774 LPM)Summary Link Performance Monitor windowIn the case of SDH STM-1 with APS the tabs on the bottom of the LPM window allow MUX(W) MUX (P) DMR (W) DMR (P) to be selected without APS MUX and DMR can beselectedROI-S06701- 82 -For PDH E1 only one Total tab is availableMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1For 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 83 -2212 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in the Summary Link Performance Monitor windowSummary Link Performance Monitor Threshold2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06701- 84 -2213 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Summary Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (Daily Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon Or it can berefreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USB cableconnecting the IDU with the PC

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

ROI-S06701- 85 -222 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON)Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) function can monitor the signal through the LAN portboth LINE-side (the port on the NE) and DMR side RMON can count the number of receivedor transmitted packets and packets errors These items are then displayed in the PNMTThe following RMON items can be monitoredRX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets received This itemmeasures from 64 octets to 1536 octetsRX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directedto the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were directed toa multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets received that were pausedRX CRC Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detected FCSerror This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Align Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedAlignment error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Symbol Errors ndash the total number of packets received that detectedSymbol error This item measures from 64 to 1536 octets in lengthRX Undersize Pkts ndash the total number of good packets received that wereless than 64 octets in lengthRX Fragments ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) receivedthat were less than 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 64 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets) received thatwere 64 octets in lengthRX Pkts 65-127 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 65 and 127 octets in lengthRX Pkts 128-255 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 128 and 255 octets in lengthRX Pkts 256-511 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 256 and 511 octets in lengthRX Pkts 512-1023 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1024-1536 ndash the total number of packets (Including bad packets)received that were between 1024 and 1536 octets in lengthRX Pkts 1537-MAX ndash the total number of good packets received that werebetween 1537 and 1916 octets in lengthRX Jabbers ndash the total number of packets received (Including bad packets)that were longer than 1537 octetsTX Unicast Pkts ndash the total number of unicast packets transmitted This itemmeasures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Broadcast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that weredirected to the broadcast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octetsin lengthTX Multicast Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were directedto a multicast address This item measures from 64 to 1916 octets in lengthTX Pause Pkts ndash the total number of packets transmitted that were pausedRMONTX Total Collisions ndash the total number of collisions when it is transmittingROI-S06701- 86 -NOTE

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

If an item causes overflowrdquo+rdquo will be shown in front ofthe numberIf an item is invalid ldquordquo will be shown in front of thenumber When the total number is incomplete it will beshown as invalidDuring maintenance mode an item will be highlighted inthe maintenance color (yellow as default)2221 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Current]This window contains the latest 15-minute data (15-min) and to the current dayrsquos total data(Daily) for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Current] MonitorSelect Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Current] in the NE-specific menu barof the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Current] windowThis data can be refreshed by selecting List 1048774 Refresh menu or clicking on RefreshiconROI-S06701- 87 -When WSLAN is set in SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) GbE over STM-1SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) WSLANFor 2-WAY configuration the DIR-ADIR-B values are displayedMain (Work) - INTFC (1) PDH E1 with LAN (16E1 2-WAYXC)ROI-S06701- 88 -2222 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [15-min]This window contains the total 15-minute data (for 24 hours) for all RMON itemsTo view LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [15-min] in the NE-specificmenu bar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] window2 This data can be saved by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu or clicking on SaveAll Data icon The default file name that it will be saved to is ldquo15minrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will bedisplayed separatelyWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 89 -To view the Select window1 Choose Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [15-min] Select windowROI-S06701- 90 -2-WAY RMON [15-min] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you wish to view by clicking the list [ ] icon and

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

selecting from the pull down menu Select All Clear All Package control for all item (s) canbe carried out for the individual PortROI-S06701- 91 -2223 Viewing LAN INTFC RMON [Daily]This window contains the daily data in 7 days for all RMON itemsTo view RMON LAN INNTFC-S [Daily] Monitor1 Select Performance Monitor 1048774 LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] in the NE-specific menubar of the target NE that you intend to monitorLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] window2 This data can be saved for all items by selecting File 1048774 Save All Data menu orclicking on Save All Data icon The default file name is ldquodailyrmonrdquo3 This data can be refreshed by selecting File 1048774 Reload menu or clicking on Reloadicon4 This data can be sorted by port or Item by selecting Sort 1048774 Port Sort or Item Sortmenu5 The viewing RMON items can be selected with the Select windowIf a WSLAN is set in the SUB (PROT) - INTFC (2) Port x (Main) and Port x (SUB) will beseparately displayedROI-S06701- 92 -To view the Select windowGo to Select 1048774 Select menuLAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowROI-S06701- 93 -LAN INTFC RMON [Daily] Select windowYou can selectdeselect the items that you want to be shown by clicking on the list [ ] buttonand selecting from the pull-down menu Select All Clear All Package control of all itemscan be carried out for individual portsROI-S06701- 94 -223 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2231 Event Log monitor1 Click [Event Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 The Event Log View will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in the Event Log window5 The date shown in the Event Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06701- 95 -224 Inventory Tab

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

The relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2241 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory tab in the PNMT main window2 The Inventory window shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial NoHardware Type and Software Version of the equipmentROI-S06701- 96 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP AddressRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRadio EM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP Address2 BranchEM1EM2Subnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadio IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE3 BranchEM1Subnet MaskEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeRadioEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

Normal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 97 -3 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as NormalNEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 98 -4 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BrachesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06701- 99 -5 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS (EM1)Radio or EM1 or EM2 or EM1EM2RadioEM2RadioEM1EM26 Select and set Routing6-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06701- 100 -

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

6-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table7 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table8 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 101 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)In Equipment Network Setting the parameters to be set for each NE are different Theparameters for each NE depend on the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)selectedCTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-BEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS (EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeIP Address DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoot NE(Bridge) Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-BEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway2 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet Mask

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

IP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskEM1EM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway3 BranchRoutingStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-A IP AddressSubnet MaskDIR-B IP AddressSubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE4 BranchEM2Subnet MaskROI-S06701- 102 -CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableEquipment TypeGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP AddressEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayNormal NE Not selectableRoutingStatic Routing TableNote Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyROI-S06701- 103 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NE(Bridge)(One IP Address is assigned to Root NE(Bridge) and Subnet is not divided)bull Branch NE (2 Branch)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branch)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branch)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEAll other NEs (except the above-mentioned ones) are simply referred to as Normal

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

NEsCategoryPortCategoryROI-S06701- 104 -2 The Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06701- 105 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE3 Set and select Port category and Routing The righthand screen will changeaccording to the item selected in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify an NE using the IP address of the respective NE A check-mark canbe affixed only to one port category of several Port categories that exist in CTRLType when Branch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set for each PortPNMS(EM1)DIR-AROI-S06701- 106 -DIR-BEM1EM2 or DIR-B or EM2EM1 or EM2 or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM24 Select and configure Routing4-1 If there is no subnet in the network the Static Routing table will not show anyentries4-2 In case of several subnets in the Network click [add] to enter the required value inthe Static Routing TableROI-S06701- 107 -5 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting[Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table[Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing table6 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking settingNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06701- 108 -lt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE19216801255255255017218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921921680102552552550

RouterROI-S06701- 109 -2 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NE

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

TypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableIP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 2 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE192168012552552550172180125525525519217218022552552551921721806525525525-5192172180662552552551921921680102552552550

Router1721803255255255192ROI-S06701- 110 -

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010PNMS (EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway172180642552552551921721803No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table IP AddressSubnet MaskDefault Gateway1721801282552552551921721803IP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065RadioSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 3 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -PNMS No01 No02 No03 No04PNMTRoot NE Normal NE Branch NE Normal NE19216801

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

25525525501721801255255255192172180225525525519217218032552552551921921680102552552550

RouterNo05 No06Normal NE Normal NE1721801302552552551921721801312552552551921721801292552552551921721806525525525-519217218066255255255192EM1EM2ROI-S06701- 111 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 172180130RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180131RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06701- 112 -4 The Network Configuration when subnet is connected( CTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge) )General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721802RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01 Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721803RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805RadioEM1EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -No01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192

RouterNo01 No02 No03 No04PNMSPNMTRoot NE(Bridge)Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE17218012552552551921721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192